《梵网经》的注释。显示巴利原文
1. Brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanā
关于游方者对话的注释。显示巴利原文
Paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā
当第一次大结集进行时,在律藏的结集圆满之际,大迦叶尊者向阿难尊者问道:“贤友阿难,《梵网经》是在何处宣说的?”等等。在这番话结束时,阿难尊者为了说明该经是在何处宣说、依何因缘宣说等全部内容,便说出了“如是我闻”等语。因此说:“《梵网经》的‘如是我闻’等序分,也是阿难尊者在第一次大结集时宣说的。”显示巴利原文
Imissā paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyā vattamānāya vinayasaṅgahāvasāne suttantapiṭake ādinikāyassa ādisuttaṃ brahmajālaṃ pucchantena āyasmatā mahākassapena – ‘‘brahmajālaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’nti, evamādivuttavacanapariyosāne yattha ca bhāsitaṃ, yañcārabbha bhāsitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ pakāsento āyasmā ānando evaṃ me sutantiādimāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brahmajālassāpi evaṃ me sutantiādikaṃ āyasmatā ānandena paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānamādī’’ti.
1 此处,“evaṃ”是不变词,“me”等为名词。在“paṭipanno hoti”中,“paṭi”是前缀,“hoti”是动词。首先当以此方式来了解词类的分别。显示巴利原文
1. Tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Paṭipanno hotīti ettha paṭīti upasaggapadaṃ, hotīti ākhyātapadanti. Iminā tāva nayena padavibhāgo veditabbo.
然而从意义上说,「evaṃ」一词首先有譬喻、教导、赞赏、呵责、接受话语、行相、示例、确定等多种不同的意义。正如它出现在这些地方:例如在“evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ”(既然这样生为人,就应该多行善)等经文中,用于譬喻。在“Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabbaṃ”(你应该这样前进,你应该这样后退)等经文中,用于教导。在“Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā”(正是如此,世尊!正是如此,善逝!)等经文中,用于赞赏。在“Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī”(这贱女却不论在哪里都称赞那个剃头沙门)等经文中,用于呵责。在“Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ”(“是的,尊者!”那些比丘回答世尊)等经文中,用于接受话语。在“Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī”(尊者,我这样了知世尊所开示的法)等经文中,用于行相。在“Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha. ‘Subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi, sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā”(来,年轻人,你去沙门阿难那里,到了以后,用我的话请问沙门阿难是否无病、无疾、身体轻快、有力、安住轻利。‘多德亚之子苏巴年轻人问尊者阿难是否无病、无疾、身体轻快、有力、安住轻利。’并且这样说:‘好,尊者阿难若能出于慈愍,前往多德亚之子苏巴年轻人的住处’)等经文中,用于示例。在“Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī”(卡拉玛们,你们怎么想?这些法是善还是不善?——不善,尊者。是有罪还是无罪?——有罪,尊者。是为智者所呵责还是为智者所称赞?——为智者所呵责,尊者。圆满执取后会带来损害和痛苦,还是不?你们在这里怎么想?——尊者,圆满执取后会带来损害和痛苦,我们在这里正是这样认为的)等经文中,用于确定。而在这里,这个「evaṃ」词应被看作具有行相、示例、确定这三个意义。显示巴利原文
Atthato pana evaṃ-saddo tāva upamūpadesasampahaṃsanagarahaṇavacanasampaṭiggahākāranidassanāvadhāraṇādianekatthappabhedo. Tathāhesa – ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53) evamādīsu upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha. ‘‘Subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’’ti. ‘‘Evañca vadehi, sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
其中,以行相义,通过「evaṃ」一词阐明这样的道理:彼世尊的话语,理趣种种、极为精微、从众多意乐中生起,义理与文句无不圆满,具足种种神变,于法义宣说与通达皆深妙难思,且能随一切众生各自的语言而传入耳中——如此话语,谁能以一切方式全然了知?然而,当尽全部心力生起欲听闻的意乐之后,便说「如是我闻」,其意即「我也以一种方式听闻了」。显示巴利原文
Tattha ākāratthena evaṃ-saddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti, nānānayanipuṇamanekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthabyañjanasampannaṃ, vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ, dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ, sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ, sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi ‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’ mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
以示例义,他说:「我不是自生者,这并非由我亲证」——以此将自己排除在外,随后用「如是我闻」「我也这样听闻」来指示现前所要宣说的全部经文。显示巴利原文
Nidassanatthena – ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento – ‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’, ‘mayāpi evaṃ suta’nti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ nidasseti.
确切而言,世尊曾这样赞叹:“诸比丘,在我这些比丘弟子中,多闻者,即此阿难;具足正行、具念、坚忍、侍奉者,即此阿难。”法将舍利弗也赞叹说:“阿难尊者于义理善巧,于法善巧,于文句善巧,于言辞善巧,于前后善巧。”阿难尊者为了显示自己与这些赞誉相应的持诵能力,并令众生生起希求闻法之心,而说“如是我闻”。同时,无论在义理还是文句上,都如实不增不减,不应视作其余意义。显示巴利原文
Avadhāraṇatthena – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.223). Evaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo, dhammakusalo, byañjanakusalo, niruttikusalo, pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169). Evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukāmataṃ janeti – ‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti.
“me”一词见于三种含义。如“gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyyaṃ”(以偈颂唱诵之食,我不应受用)等句中,义为“被我”。在“Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetu”(萨度,尊者,愿世尊为我简略说法)等句中,义为“为我”。在“Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha”(诸比丘,你们当成为我的法嗣)等句中,义为“我的”。而在此处,则兼有“被我听闻”与“我的听闻”两种意义。显示巴利原文
Me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa – ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave , bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana mayā sutanti ca, mama sutanti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
“suta”一词,有带前缀与不带前缀的用法,其义可分为“前往”“闻名”“漏湿”“积集”“专务”“耳所识”“随耳门而了知”等多种差别。例如,在“senāya pasuto”(追随军队)等句中,义为“前往的”。在“Sutadhammassa passato”(见闻法者)等句中,义为“闻名的法”。在“Avassutā avassutassa”(漏湿者对漏湿者)等句中,义为“漏湿的”。在“Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ”(你们已积集众多福德)等句中,义为“积集的”。在“Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā”(那些专务禅那的智者)等句中,义为“专务禅那的”。在“Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ”(所见、所闻、所觉)等句中,义为“耳所识的”。在“Sutadharo sutasannicayo”(持所闻者、积聚所闻者)等句中,义为“随耳门而了知并受持者”。而在此处,其义为“依耳门而受持的”或“受持”。因为当“me”的意义是“被我”时,显示巴利原文
Sutanti ayaṃ suta-saddo saupasaggo ca anupasaggo ca – gamanavissutakilinna-upacitānuyoga-sotaviññeyya-sotadvārānusāra-viññātādianekatthappabhedo, tathā hissa ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) kilinnākilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vāti attho. ‘Me’ saddassa hi ‘mayā’ti atthe sati ‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ’ sotadvārānusārena upadhāritanti yujjati. ‘Mamā’ti atthe sati evaṃ mama sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇanti yujjati.
如是,在这三个词中,「evaṃ」指示耳识等识的作用;「me」指示具有该识的补特伽罗;「sutaṃ」指示遮止未曾听闻、无增无减、不颠倒执取。同样地,「evaṃ」显示依耳门转起的识道以种种方式于所缘转起;「me」显示自身;「sutaṃ」显示法。此处的要义是:“当识道以种种方式于所缘转起时,我并未造作他事,唯一所作即是此——此法被如此听闻。”显示巴利原文
Evametesu tīsu padesu evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgipuggalanidassanaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Tathā evanti tassā sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – ‘‘nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti.
同样地,「evaṃ」显示应被指出的法;「me」显示补特伽罗;「sutaṃ」显示补特伽罗所行之事。也就是说:“我将要指出的所闻,正是我如此听闻的。”显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti niddisitabbadhammappakāsanaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ suta’’nti.
同样地,「evaṃ」是对于以种种方式转起、执取了种种义理与文句的心相续之方式的指称;因为「evaṃ」正是方式的施设。「me」是指称作者;「sutaṃ」是指称所缘。至此,以此种种方式转起的心相续的拥有者——作者,便完成了对所缘的执取与确定。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso. Evanti hi ayamākārapaññatti. Meti kattuniddeso. Sutanti visayaniddeso. Ettāvatā nānākārappavattena cittasantānena taṃ samaṅgino kattu visayaggahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti.
或者,「evaṃ」是补特伽罗所作事的指称;「sutaṃ」是识所作事的指称;「me」是兼具这两种所作的那个补特伽罗的指称。此处的要义为:“由我——这个具有听闻作用的识的补特伽罗,依于识而获得‘听闻之所作’的称谓,如此而听闻。”显示巴利原文
Athavā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo, ‘‘mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena suta’’nti.
其中,「evaṃ」和「me」是依真实建立、从究竟义而言不存在的施设。因为在究竟义上,哪里真有一个可被指称为“evaṃ”或“me”的东西呢?而「sutaṃ」是存在的施设,因为此处由耳所获得的,在究竟义上是存在的。同样地,「evaṃ」和「me」由于需要依于种种事物才能被言说,故为依止施设;「sutaṃ」由于是比对所见等才被言说,故为譬喻施设。这里,「evaṃ」一词表明不迷乱,因为迷乱的人不能通达种种方式。「sutaṃ」一词表明对所闻的不忘失,因为若所闻被忘失,过后便不会承认“我曾听闻”。由此,通过不迷乱成就了慧;通过不忘失成就了念。其中,以慧为先导的念能够确定文句;以念为先导的慧能够通达义理。由于兼具这两种能力,便能拥有义理和文句圆满的法库,并能守护它,因此成就为法库的守护者。显示巴利原文
Tattha evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha? Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti. Yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti. Tathā ‘eva’nti ca, meti ca, taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. ‘Suta’nti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti. Ettha ca evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti. ‘Suta’nti vacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti, na so kālantarena mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, asammosena pana satisiddhi. Tattha paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā, satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthapaṭivedhasamatthatā. Tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthato dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释:「evaṃ」一词显示了如理作意,因为不如理作意者,便不能通达种种方式。「sutaṃ」一词显示了无散乱,因为心散乱者便没有听闻。确实,一个心散乱的补特伽罗,即使对他宣说一切成就,他也会说:“我没有听到,请再说一遍。”这里,如理作意成就了自身的正誓愿和过去所造的福业;因为若誓愿不正确,或过去未造福业,便无有这些。无散乱则成就了听闻正法和亲近善士;因为心散乱者不能听闻,而不亲近善士者则无有听闻。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo, evanti vacanena yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti. Ayoniso manasikaroto hi nānappakārapaṭivedhābhāvato. Sutanti vacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti, vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yoniso manasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti, sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti. Na hi vikkhittacitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupassayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
另一种解释:「如是」——对于心相续,由于它以种种方式转起,而执取种种义理与文句,因此称为「种种方式的说明」。这种善美的状况,对于一个过去未曾正确立愿、或先前未修福业的人是不会出现的。因此,「如是」正是以这种善美的方式,显示他自己获得了后一双成就。而「闻」则通过听闻的关系,显示前一双成就。因为,若住在不适当的地方,或远离善士的亲近,就不会有听闻。这样,由后一双成就的圆满,便成就了意乐的清净;由前一双成就的圆满,便成就了加行的清净。又由于意乐清净,便成就了证悟与通利;由于加行清净,便成就了教说与通利。所以,一个加行清净、意乐清净、具足教说与证悟的人所说的话,就像曙光对于日出,又如如理作意对于善业,堪能作为世尊话语的前导。因此,将起因安立于适当之处,而说「如是我闻」等开头语。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo, yasmā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddesoti vuttaṃ, so ca evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammāappaṇihitattano pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti, tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakenākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattimattano dīpeti. Sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpadese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa vā savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhisiddhā hoti, purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi, tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato yoniso manasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento – ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādimāha.
另一种解释:「如是」——这个显示种种通达的词语,表明了自身拥有义无碍解与辩无碍解的成就。「闻」——这个显示所闻类别通达的词语,表明了拥有法无碍解与词无碍解的成就。而且,当他说出「如是」这个显示如理作意的词语时,他是在表明:「这些法,已被我以意善加审察,以见善加通达。」当他说出「闻」这个显示听闻关系的词语时,他是在表明:「众多的法,已被我听闻、受持,以语言反复研习。」通过这两者,他显示了义理与文句的圆满,从而让人对听闻生起尊重。因为,若一个人对于义理与文句皆圆满的法,不尊重地去听闻,他就会与巨大的利益隔绝。是故,应当生起尊重之心,恭敬地听闻此法。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo, ‘eva’nti iminā nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘Suta’nti iminā sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ. ‘Eva’nti ca idaṃ yoniso manasikāradīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. ‘Suta’nti idaṃ savanayogadīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Tadubhayenāpi atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti, tasmā ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ ayaṃ dhammo sotabboti.
而通过「如是我闻」这整句话,具寿阿难对于如来说示的法,不执为自所有,从而超越了非善人的境地;他承认自己只是声闻,由此进入了善士的境地。同样地,他把心从非正法中抽离出来,安置于正法。当他表明「这纯粹是我所听闻的,正是彼世尊的话」时,他便从中解脱了自己,将法归于导师,随顺了胜者之语,确立了法的轨道。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’nti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati. Sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā, tasseva bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
再者,他不宣称「如是我闻」是自己所创,并进一步阐明前语,表示:「这是我从彼世尊面前亲受的——彼世尊具备四无所畏,具足十力,安住于牛王之位,作狮子吼,是一切有情中的最上者、法自在主、法王、法主、法灯、法皈依处、正法胜转轮王、正自觉者。对此,无论在义理、法、语句或文句上,都不应生起丝毫的犹豫或疑惑。」如此,他摧毁一切天、人对这法的无信,成就信心的生起。因此,是这样说的——显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivaranto – ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kātabbā’’ti sabbesaṃ devamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādeti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
它摧毁无信,于教法中增长信心;
乔达摩弟子如此说:『如是我闻……』
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
“一”是对计数方面的限定说明;“时”是对限定方面的说明;“一时”则是不加确切指定地表示。在此,“时”这个字——显示巴利原文
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
“时”一词,可用于和合、刹那、时间,也可用于集会、原因、邪见等处。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati’’.
例如:“但愿我们明日也能依时机与因缘前往亲近”等(长部·大品·447),此处的“时”指“集会”义。“诸比丘!梵行生活唯有一刹那与一时节”等(增支部·8集·29),此处的“时”指“刹那”。“酷热之时、极热之时”等(波逸提·358),此处的“时”指“时间”。“森林中的大集会”等(长部·大品·332),此处的“时”指“集会”。“跋达利!你实未通达其时:世尊正住在舍卫城,世尊也会知道,我——比丘跋达利,于大师的教法中于修学尚未圆满。跋达利!这也是你未通达之时”等(中部·2·135),此处的“时”指“原因”。“其时,游方僧乌加诃马那·萨摩那木迪卡子,执时论、穿廷杜卡树衣、住单层屋,住在末利夫人的苑林”等(中部·2·260),此处的“时”指“邪见”。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa – ‘‘appevanāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332) samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati, bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho, te bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggahamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi.
“在见法中,凡是利益,以及来世的利益;
因为通达了利益,坚稳者就被称为贤者。”——(相应部·1·128)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.128) –
在部分经文中,“时”指“获得”。如“以正断除慢,令苦终尽”等(增支部·7集·9),此处的“时”指“断除”。“苦有逼恼义、有为义、热恼义、变易义、现观义”等(无碍解道·108),这里的“时”指“证悟”。然而在此处,它是时间义。因此,“一时”一词意指:于年、季、月、半月、夜、日、上午、中午、下午、初夜、中夜、后夜、须臾等种种时间差别中,取其某一时段。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.9) pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. 108) paṭivedho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tena saṃvaccharautumāsaḍḍhamāsarattidivapubbaṇhamajjhanhikasāyanhapaṭhamamajjhi-mapacchimayāmamuhuttādīsu kālappabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
虽然长老以智慧完全了知、善加确定为某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜间或某白天所说的任何经典,然而,若直接说“如是我闻:于某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜分或某日分”,则不易安住记忆,不便诵习,亦不便教导他人诵习,且多说言辞。因此,便以一个词总摄其义,而说“一时”。或者,世尊在人间与天界,有着种种显然不同的时间差别,如入胎时、诞生时、感悚惧时、出家时、行苦行时、降魔时、成正自觉时、见法安乐住时、开示时、般涅槃时等。于这些时中,指开示之时,故说“一时”。再者,在智慧作用与悲悯作用两种时中,指悲悯作用之时;在自利修行与利他修行两种时中,指利他修行之时;在集会大众的两种应作时中,指说法之时;在开示与修行两种时中,指开示之时——为指明这些时间中的某一种,而说“一时”。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yasmiṃ yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge vā divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana – ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’’ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vāti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha. Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo, jātisamayo, saṃvegasamayo, abhinikkhamanasamayo, dukkarakārikasamayo, māravijayasamayo, abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo, desanāsamayo, parinibbānasamayoti, evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya pakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā. Tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo cāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu karuṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitapaṭipattisamayesu parahitapaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammikathāsamayo desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesupi samayesu aññataraṃ samayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
问:为什么在这里不像阿毗达摩那样用位置格(如“yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara”,《法集论》1),也不像其他经句用位置格,也不像律藏中用工具格(“tena samayena buddho bhagavā”),而用了业格说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”呢?答:因为在那些地方如此表述,与这里意义不同。在阿毗达摩和那些经句中,存在着“所依”义,并借由“有”来显示“有之相”。其中,“所依”即是时间义,“集合”也是“时”义。依刹那和合而假立的“时”之存在,用来标示各处所说的触等诸法之存在。因此,为了显示这个意义,就在那里用了位置格。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’’nti (dha. sa. 1) ca, ito aññesu ca suttapadesu – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’ti ca bhummavacananiddeso kato, vinaye ca – ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti karaṇavacanena, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti upayogavacananiddeso katoti? Tattha tathā idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvena bhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho, samūhattho ca samayo, tattha tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacananiddeso kato.
而在律藏中,则具“因”义与“作具”义。因为,那些学处的制定时机,即便是舍利弗等也难以了知;世尊是以彼时为因、以彼时为缘,为待学处制定的因缘成就而安住于各处。因此,为显明此义,在律藏中便以作具格加以表述。显示巴利原文
Vinaye ca hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
然而,在此处及其他同类经中,则具“彻底结合”之义。意思是:世尊在宣说此经或他经的那个时候,是彻底安住于悲心之中而住于彼时的。因此,为显明此义,这里便以业格的语词来表述“时”。显示巴利原文
Idha pana aññasmiñca evaṃ jātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā imaṃ aññaṃ vā suttantaṃ desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacananiddeso katoti.
因此,这样说:显示巴利原文
Tenetaṃ vuccati –
在其他地方,考虑到不同的义理,或用处格、或用工具格来表示‘时’;
而在此处,此‘时’乃是用对格来表示。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
然而,古代老师们这样解释道:`tasmiṃ samaye`(于那时)、`tena samayena`(以那时)或 `ekaṃ samayaṃ`(一时),这些仅是说法上的差异,在一切情况下实际意义皆为处格。因此,即使说 `ekaṃ samayaṃ`,也应理解为 `ekasmiṃ samaye`(在一个时候)的意思。显示巴利原文
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā, ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā, ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā, abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummamevatthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ‘‘ekasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
“世尊”(Bhagavā):意为尊崇者。世间称值得尊崇之人为“世尊”。而此位(佛陀)由于具足一切殊胜功德,于一切众生中最为尊崇,故应知他得名为“世尊”。古德亦云:显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti garu. Garuñhi loke bhagavāti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā bhagavāti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
“世尊”之词,最为殊胜;“世尊”之号,最上无上;
他可敬,且具足恭敬之德,是故得名为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
他具足幸运(bhāgyavā)、已破坏一切不善(bhaggavā),并以种种幸运而显胜(bhagehi ca vibhattavā);
他具足供养、已弃吐烦恼而游方,因此在诸有之中,称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti.
依此偈颂,“世尊”一词的详细含义应如此了知。这些含义在《清净道论》佛随念的解说中已有阐述。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya vasenassa padassa vitthāraattho veditabbo. So ca visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vuttoyeva.
至此,以“如是我闻”一语,显示了依所闻而得的法,这便是亲证世尊的法身。以此安慰那些因不见导师而深感焦虑之人,令其了知:“此圣典并非导师般涅槃后方有的教法;此(圣典)即是你们的导师。”显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ dassento bhagavato dhammakāyaṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti. Tena ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti.
以“一时,世尊”一语,则显示彼时世尊已不存于世间,由此证实了世尊色身的般涅槃。以此警醒那些沉醉于生命而骄慢之人:“就连如此教导圣法、具足十力、身如金刚的世尊,也已般涅槃,还有什么能让我们对生命抱有期望呢?”并策励他们于正法中精进努力。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti. Tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma ariyadhammassa desako dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghāta samānakāyo sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kena aññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.
而“如是”一词,表明开示的成就;“我闻”表明声闻弟子的成就;“一时”表明时机的成就;“世尊”表明说法者的成就。显示巴利原文
Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ.
“antarā”(之间)一词,在经典中用于表示原因、刹那、心、中间、空隙等含义。例如,在“Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā”(增支部6.44)等中,“antarā”指原因;在“Addasa maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī”(中部2.149)等中,指刹那;在“Yassantarato na santi kopā”(自说20)等中,指心;在“Antarā vosānamāpādī”(小品350)等中,指中间;在“Api cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī”(波罗夷231)等中,指空隙。在这里,它是用在“空隙”的意义上,因此这句话应理解为“在王舍城与那烂陀之间的空隙处”。此外,由于与“antarā”一词搭配……显示巴利原文
Antarā ca rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti antarā-saddo kāraṇakhaṇacittavemajjhavivarādīsu dissati. ‘‘Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā’’ti (a. ni. 6.44) ca, ‘‘janā saṅgamma mantenti mañca tañca kimantara’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.228) ca ādīsu hi kāraṇe antarā-saddo. ‘‘Addasa maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. ‘‘Antarā vosānamāpādī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 350) vemajjhe. ‘‘Api cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare. Svāyamidha vivare vattati, tasmā rājagahassa ca nāḷandāya ca vivareti evametthattho veditabbo. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti, ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Idha pana yojetvāyeva vuttoti.
“已踏上长途道路”的意思是已经走上了称为长途的道路,也就是“长路”。因为在解释长途行旅时节的《分别》中,有“心想‘我要走半由旬’而应进食”等说法,所以半由旬也算作长途道路。不过,从王舍城到那烂陀刚好是一由旬。显示巴利原文
Addhānamaggappaṭipannohotīti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno hoti, ‘‘dīghamagga’’nti attho. Addhānagamanasamayassa hi vibhaṅge ‘‘aḍḍhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’ntiādivacanato (pāci. 218) aḍḍhayojanampi addhānamaggo hoti. Rājagahato pana nāḷandā yojanameva.
「与大的比丘僧团一起」——“大”既指功德上的殊胜,也指数量上的众多。这个比丘僧团由于具足少欲等功德,在功德上确实是殊胜的;又因有五百位之多,在数量上也很大。比丘的聚合便称为“比丘僧团”,与这个比丘僧团一起,即与那个由见和同、戒和同而共住的僧团在一起。“一起”就是一同。显示巴利原文
Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti ‘mahatā’ti guṇamahattenapi mahatā, saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. So hi bhikkhusaṅgho guṇehipi mahā ahosi, appicchatādiguṇasamannāgatattā. Saṅkhyāyapi mahā, pañcasatasaṅkhyattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho ‘bhikkhusaṅgho’, tena bhikkhusaṅghena. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅkhātena samaṇagaṇenāti attho. Saddhinti ekato.
「以大约五百位比丘」——“五百”是指这些比丘大约有五百位。“mattā”意为分量、尺度。因此,正如“于食知量者”意思是“在食物上知道分量,知道尺度”,这里也应同样理解:“那些数百比丘,大约有五百,即五百之数。”“比丘的百数”就是数百比丘,以那大约五百位比丘。显示巴利原文
Pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehīti pañcamattā etesanti pañcamattāni. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ vuccati, tasmā yathā ‘‘bhojane mattaññū’’ti vutte ‘‘bhojane mattaṃ jānāti, pamāṇaṃ jānātī’’ti attho hoti, evamidhāpi – ‘‘tesaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañcamattā pañcapamāṇa’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhūnaṃ satāni bhikkhusatāni, tehi pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.
「外道行者须卑」——“须卑”是他的名字。“pi”字是为了将同行于道的人汇集在一起而说。“kho”字是连接词,用来使音节流畅。“外道行者”是指删阇耶的内弟子——车匿外道行者。这里的意思是:“每当世尊走上那条长途道路时,外道行者须卑也同样走上了。”此处的“hoti”一词有过去时的意义。显示巴利原文
Suppiyopikho paribbājakoti suppiyoti tassa nāmaṃ. Pi-kāro maggappaṭipannasabhāgatāya puggalasampiṇḍanattho. Kho-kāro padasandhikaro, byañjanasiliṭṭhatāvasena vutto. Paribbājakoti sañjayassa antevāsī channaparibbājako. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yadā bhagavā taṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno, tadā suppiyopi paribbājako paṭipanno ahosī’’ti. Atītakālattho hettha hoti-saddo.
“与名为梵授的青年内弟子一起”:此处,“内弟子”指住在近处者,即亲近随侍的弟子。“梵授”是他的名字。“青年”一词,亦可指众生、盗贼或年轻的人。显示巴利原文
Saddhiṃ antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenāti – ettha ante vasatīti antevāsī. Samīpacāro santikāvacaro sissoti attho. Brahmadattoti tassa nāmaṃ. Māṇavoti sattopi coropi taruṇopi vuccati.
虽为天使所告诫,这些青年却仍放逸;
那些投生卑劣身者,长夜陷于忧苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Coditā devadūtehi, ye pamajjanti māṇavā; Te dīgharattaṃ socanti, hīnakāyūpagā narā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.271) –
在这些例子中,有情被称为「青年」;又如“与青年们相聚,不论已作业者还是未作业者”等处,「青年」指盗贼;而在“青年庵婆咤”、“青年盎伽”等处,「青年」则指年轻人。此处也取这个意思。整句即:“与名为梵授的年轻内弟子一起”。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu hi satto māṇavoti vutto. ‘‘Māṇavehipi samāgacchanti katakammehipi akatakammehipī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) coro. ‘‘Ambaṭṭho māṇavo, aṅgako māṇavo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.316) taruṇo ‘māṇavo’ti vutto. Idhāpi ayamevattho. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – brahmadattena nāma taruṇantevāsinā saddhinti.
Tatra:指“在那条长途道路上”,或指“在那两个人之中”。Suda:仅是一个助词。“以种种方式”(Anekapariyāyena):这里的“pariyāya”一词,可表示场合、开示、原因等。例如在“阿难,今天还有什么场合让我去教诫比丘尼呢?”这类经文中,pariyāya 表示场合;在“你当持守这‘蜜丸’的开示”中,表示开示;在“刹帝利,以此理由,当如此”中,表示原因。在此处也是表示原因,所以整句的意思是:“以种种原因”、“以多种原因”,如此说。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tasmiṃ addhānamagge, tesu vā dvīsu janesu. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Anekapariyāyenāti pariyāya-saddo tāva vāradesanākāraṇesu vattati. ‘‘Kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398) hi vāre pariyāyasaddo vattati. ‘‘Madhupiṇḍikapariyāyotveva naṃ dhārehī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) desanāyaṃ. ‘‘Imināpi kho, te rājañña, pariyāyena evaṃ hotū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.411) kāraṇe. Svāyamidhāpi kāraṇe vattati, tasmā ayamettha attho – ‘‘anekavidhena kāraṇenā’’ti, ‘‘bahūhi kāraṇehī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti.
“说佛陀的坏话”(avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati):对于那远离过失、具足无量功德的佛陀世尊,他却这样说——“世间对尊长和有身份者应尽的致敬等合宜行为,称为‘和合味’,而沙门乔达摩并没有这些,因此沙门乔达摩是无味的、无福德的、主张无作的、主张断灭的、令人厌恶的、须调伏的、苦行的、无胆量的。沙门乔达摩没有超越常人的法,没有无上圣者的如实知见之殊胜。沙门乔达摩所开示的法,是依推论而成的法,随推测而转,出自他自己的辩才。沙门乔达摩并非一切知者,不是世间解,不是无上者,不是最上人。”像这样,他将种种并非原因的说成原因,以各种方式说佛陀的坏话、指责过失、加以诽谤。显示巴利原文
Buddhassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti avaṇṇavirahitassa aparimāṇavaṇṇasamannāgatassāpi buddhassa bhagavato – ‘‘yaṃ loke jātivuḍḍhesu kattabbaṃ abhivādanādisāmīcikammaṃ ‘sāmaggiraso’ti vuccati, taṃ samaṇassa gotamassa natthi tasmā arasarūpo samaṇo gotamo, nibbhogo, akiriyavādo, ucchedavādo, jegucchī, venayiko, tapassī, apagabbho. Natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttarimanussadhammo alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Takkapariyāhataṃ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṃ deseti, vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ, sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ. Samaṇo gotamo na sabbaññū, na lokavidū, na anuttaro, na aggapuggalo’’ti. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ akāraṇameva kāraṇanti vatvā tathā tathā avaṇṇaṃ dosaṃ nindaṃ bhāsati.
如同对佛陀那样,对法亦然:他把种种并非原因的事说成原因,说道:‘沙门乔达摩的法不善解说、难以彻证、不能导向出离、不能导向寂静。’如此以种种方式诽谤法。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca buddhassa, evaṃ dhammassāpi taṃ taṃ akāraṇameva kāraṇato vatvā – ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassa dhammo durakkhāto, duppaṭivedito, aniyyāniko, anupasamasaṃvattaniko’’ti tathā tathā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.
如同对法那样,对僧伽亦然:他把种种并非原因的事说成原因,说道:‘沙门乔达摩的声闻僧团,行邪道、行曲道、行相违道、行不顺道、行随非法之道。’如此以种种方式诽谤僧伽。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca dhammassa, evaṃ saṅghassāpi yaṃ vā taṃ vā akāraṇameva kāraṇato vatvā – ‘‘micchāpaṭipanno samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakasaṅgho, kuṭilapaṭipanno, paccanīkapaṭipadaṃ ananulomapaṭipadaṃ adhammānulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno’’ti tathā tathā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.
然而他的内弟子心中思惟:‘我们的老师抓住了不该抓的,踏上了不该踏的。这就好比吞下火团,以手触碰剑刃,以拳欲碎须弥山,在锯齿之间嬉戏,以手去抓狂暴怒象——他对本应受到赞扬的三宝却说坏话,必将遭遇不幸与灾祸。再者,当老师踏进粪坑、火堆、荆棘,或踩到黑蛇,攀上尖桩,吞下剧毒,饮入碱水,乃至坠入地狱深渊之时,内弟子也不必一一跟着去做。因为众生是各自业的主人,随业而各自受生。父亲不因儿子的业而受生,儿子不因父亲的业而受生;母亲不因儿子的业而受生,儿子不因母亲的业而受生;兄弟不因姊妹的业而受生,姊妹不因兄弟的业而受生;老师不因内弟子的业而受生,内弟子不因老师的业而受生。我的老师在诽谤三宝,而诽谤圣者可是极大的恶行啊。’他这样如理省思之后,破斥老师的说法,正确地举出真实的理由,以种种方式开始称扬三宝的功德,正如同一位具足智慧种姓的良家子弟所为。因此,经文说:‘然而,游方者须卑的内弟子——青年梵授,以种种方式称扬佛的功德,以种种方式称扬法的功德,以种种方式称扬僧伽的功德。’显示巴利原文
Antevāsī panassa – ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo aparāmasitabbaṃ parāmasati, anakkamitabbaṃ akkamati, svāyaṃ aggiṃ gilanto viya, hatthena asidhāraṃ parāmasanto viya, muṭṭhinā sineruṃ padāletukāmo viya, kakacadantapantiyaṃ kīḷamāno viya, pabhinnamadaṃ caṇḍahatthiṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya ca vaṇṇārahasseva ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsamāno anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇissati. Ācariye kho pana gūthaṃ vā aggiṃ vā kaṇṭakaṃ vā kaṇhasappaṃ vā akkamante, sūlaṃ vā abhirūhante, halāhalaṃ vā visaṃ khādante, khārodakaṃ vā pakkhalante, narakapapātaṃ vā papatante, na antevāsinā taṃ sabbamanukātabbaṃ hoti. Kammassakā hi sattā attano kammānurūpameva gatiṃ gacchanti. Neva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena, na mātā puttassa, na putto mātuyā, na bhātā bhaginiyā, na bhaginī bhātu, na ācariyo antevāsino, na antevāsī ācariyassa kammena gacchati. Mayhañca ācariyo tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, mahāsāvajjo kho panāriyūpavādoti. Evaṃ yoniso ummujjitvā ācariyavādaṃ maddamāno sammākāraṇameva kāraṇato apadisanto anekapariyāyena tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitumāraddho, yathā taṃ paṇḍitajātiko kulaputto’’. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘suppiyassa pana paribbājakassa antevāsī brahmadatto māṇavo anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti.
此处,“vaṇṇa”一词,可用于外形、种姓、色处、原因、量度、功德、称赞等含义。例如,在“化作一条大蛇王般的外形”等语句中,是指外形;在“婆罗门是最上等的种姓,其他种姓是低劣的”等语句中,是指种姓;在“具足最殊胜的肤色之美”等语句中,是指色处。显示巴利原文
Tattha vaṇṇanti vaṇṇa-saddo saṇṭhāna-jāti-rūpāyatana-kāraṇa-pamāṇa-guṇa-pasaṃsādīsu dissati . Tattha ‘‘mahantaṃ sapparājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.142) saṇṭhānaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.402) jāti. ‘‘Paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.303) rūpāyatanaṃ.
我不摘取,不折断,只是远远地嗅闻水中之花;
那么,因何缘故,被称为“盗香者”呢?」(《相应部》1.234)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na harāmi na bhañjāmi, ārā siṅghāmi vārijaṃ; Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhatthenoti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.234) –
在一些经句中,‘vaṇṇa’是指原因;在‘钵有三种量’(《波罗夷》602)等句中,是指量度;在‘居士们,你们是从什么时候知道沙门乔达摩的这些功德的?’(《中部》2.77)等句中,是指功德;在‘他称赞应受称赞者’(《增支部》2.135)等句中,是指赞叹。而在这里,‘vaṇṇa’既指功德,也指赞叹。据说这位青年依据那些真实的原因,以种种方式宣说了与三宝功德相连的赞叹。
其中,佛陀的功德,应当通过‘彼世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……’(《波罗夷》1)等教导,以及‘诸比丘,若对佛有净信,即是对最胜者有净信’、‘诸比丘,有一人出现于世……无可比拟,无可等伦’(《增支部》1.174)等教导来了知。
法的功德,应当通过‘法为世尊所善说’(《长部》2.159)、‘阿赖耶的根除,轮回的截断’(《小部·如是语》90、《增支部》4.34)以及‘诸比丘,若对圣八支道有净信,即是对最胜者有净信’等教导来了知。
僧的功德,应当通过‘世尊的弟子僧团是善行道者’(《长部》2.159)、‘诸比丘,若对僧有净信,即是对最胜者有净信’(《增支部》)等教导来了知。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇaṃ. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana, te gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) guṇo. ‘‘Vaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 2.135) pasaṃsā. Idha guṇopi pasaṃsāpi. Ayaṃ kira taṃ taṃ bhūtameva kāraṇaṃ apadisanto anekapariyāyena ratanattayassa guṇūpasañhitaṃ pasaṃsaṃ abhāsi. Tattha – ‘‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (pārā. 1) nayena, ‘‘ye bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā agge te pasannā’’tiādinā ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati…pe… asamo asamasamo’’tiādinā (a. ni. 1.174) ca nayena buddhassa vaṇṇo veditabbo. ‘‘Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.159) ca ‘‘ālayasamugghāto vaṭṭupacchedo’’ti (iti. 90, a. ni. 4.34) ca, ‘‘ye bhikkhave, ariye aṭṭhaṅgike magge pasannā, agge te pasannā’’ti ca evamādīhi nayehi dhammassa vaṇṇo veditabbo. ‘‘Suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’ti (dī. ni. 2.159) ca, ‘‘ye, bhikkhave, saṅghe pasannā, agge te pasannā’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) ca evamādīhi pana nayehi saṅghassa vaṇṇo veditabbo. Pahontena pana dhammakathikena pañcanikāye navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassāni ogāhitvā buddhādīnaṃ vaṇṇo pakāsetabbo. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne buddhādīnaṃ guṇe pakāsento atitthena pakkhando dhammakathikoti na sakkā vattuṃ. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu dhammakathikassa thāmo veditabbo. Brahmadatto pana māṇavo anussavādimattasambandhitena attano thāmena ratanattayassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.
‘就如那样,那师生二人’:即指那两位师生。‘互相地’:指一个对另一个。‘直接唱反调者’:意思是丝毫不加回避,直截了当地提出各种对立的主张,一再地成为对手。当老师宣说对三宝的诽谤时,弟子便宣说功德;老师又说诽谤,弟子又说功德——就这样,老师如同在木板上钉下一根根毒木之钉,一再地诽谤三宝;弟子则如同用金银珠宝之钉,来抵御那根毒钉,一再地赞叹三宝功德。因此才称为‘直接唱反调者’。显示巴利原文
Itiha te ubho ācariyantevāsīti evaṃ te dve ācariyantevāsikā. Aññamaññassāti añño aññassa. Ujuvipaccanīkavādāti īsakampi apariharitvā ujumeva vividhapaccanīkavādā, anekavāraṃ viruddhavādā eva hutvāti attho. Ācariyena hi ratanattayassa avaṇṇe bhāsite antevāsī vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, puna itaro avaṇṇaṃ, itaro vaṇṇanti evaṃ ācariyo sāraphalake visarukkhaāṇiṃ ākoṭayamāno viya punappunaṃ ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati. Antevāsī pana suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimayāya āṇiyā taṃ āṇiṃ paṭibāhayamāno viya punappunaṃ ratanattayassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ujuvipaccanīkavādā’’ti.
‘紧随世尊及比丘僧团之后而行’:即紧紧跟在世尊和比丘僧团之后,始终不舍离其身影,以随行其威仪的方式紧随其后,如同仰视者一般随行。显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañcāti bhagavantañca bhikkhusaṅghañca pacchato pacchato dassanaṃ avijahantā iriyāpathānubandhanena anubandhā honti, sīsānulokino hutvā anugatā hontīti attho.
那么,世尊为何踏上那段长途?须卑又为何尾随其后?他又为何毁谤三宝?那时,世尊住在王舍城周围十八座大寺中的一座。清晨整理好身体,到了乞食之时,便在比丘僧团的围绕下,入王舍城乞食。那一天,世尊让比丘僧团轻易得到了团食。午后,从受食处归来,世尊令比丘僧团持好钵与衣,说道:‘我将前往那烂陀’,便步出王舍城,踏上了那条路。当时,须卑也住在王舍城附近的某处游方者园中,由游方众围绕,在王舍城乞食。那天,他也为游方众安排了易得的食物,用过早餐,令游方者们持好资具,心想:‘我也去那烂陀’。他不知世尊已经走上了那条路,便这样跟随在后。倘若他知道,便不会跟随了。他就这样不知情地走着,抬头四望时,看见了世尊——正以佛陀的威光辉耀,仿佛被红色的毛毯所围绕,宛如一座移动的金山之巅。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana bhagavā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno? Kasmā ca suppiyo anubandho? Kasmā ca so ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti? Bhagavā tāva tasmiṃ kāle rājagahaparivattakesu aṭṭhārasasu mahāvihāresu aññatarasmiṃ vasitvā pātova sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto rājagahe piṇḍāya carati. So taṃ divasaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa sulabhapiṇḍapātaṃ katvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘nāḷandaṃ gamissāmī’’ti, rājagahato nikkhamitvā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno. Suppiyopi kho tasmiṃ kāle rājagahaparivattake aññatarasmiṃ paribbājakārāme vasitvā paribbājakaparivuto rājagahe bhikkhāya carati. Sopi taṃ divasaṃ paribbājakaparisāya sulabhabhikkhaṃ katvā bhuttapātarāso paribbājake paribbājakaparikkhāraṃ gāhāpetvā – nāḷandaṃ gamissāmicceva bhagavato taṃ maggaṃ paṭipannabhāvaṃ ajānantova anubandho. Sace pana jāneyya nānubandheyya. So ajānitvāva gacchanto gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā olokayamāno bhagavantaṃ addasa buddhasiriyā sobhamānaṃ rattakambalaparikkhittamiva jaṅgamakanakagirisikharaṃ.
据说,那时从十力尊的身体放出六色光明,向四面八方放射,遍及约八十肘的范围。那光芒宛如撒开的珠宝网、宝链与宝粉,又如铺展开来的宝绘金毯,又像流淌的赤金溶液;既如上百支火炬同时闪耀,又如无量迦尼迦罗花持续纷飞,又似被风扬起的支那的红粉,更像彩虹、闪电与星群之光竞相迸射,令整片山林璀璨夺目。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ kira samaye dasabalassa sarīrato nikkhamitvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo samantā asītihatthappamāṇe padese ādhāvanti vidhāvanti ratanāveḷaratanadāmaratanacuṇṇavippakiṇṇaṃ viya, pasāritaratanacittakañcanapaṭamiva, rattasuvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānamiva, ukkāsatanipātasamākulamiva, nirantaravippakiṇṇakaṇikārapupphamiva vāyuvegakkhittacīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇamiva, indadhanuvijjulatātārāgaṇappabhāvisaravipphuritaviccharitamiva ca taṃ vanantaraṃ hoti.
世尊的身体由八十种随形好所庄严,犹如盛开的青莲与红莲,又如全然绽放的巴利恰答咖树,如星芒绽放,其光辉令虚空也为之失色。他身上的一寻圆光,如同将三十二殊胜相编成的花环;三十二相的光轮依次排列,其威光仿佛超越了共三十二位转轮王、帝释天王与大梵天的光辉。在那些围绕世尊站立的比丘中,皆为少欲、知足、远离尘嚣、不混杂、谴责恶行、堪受批评者,皆具足戒行,成就了定、慧、解脱与解脱知见。在他们当中,世尊如同被红毯城墙所围绕的金柱,如同处于红莲丛中的金船,如同被珊瑚篱墙所围的火聚,如同星群所绕的满月,令鸟兽亦悦目,更何况诸天与人。而那天,大多为八十位大长老,披着云雾色的粪扫衣,偏袒一肩,手持杖竿,如披金铠的香象,已离瞋恚、已断烦恼、已破缠结、已解结缚,围绕着世尊。世尊自己已离贪,被已离贪者围绕;已离瞋,被已离瞋者围绕;已离痴,被已离痴者围绕;已离渴爱,被已离渴爱者围绕;已无烦恼,被无烦恼者围绕;自身是佛,被随觉者所围绕。犹如为花瓣所绕的花蕊,又如为花蕊所绕的花心;又如为八千头象围绕的。显示巴利原文
Asīti anubyañjanānurañjitañca pana bhagavato sarīraṃ vikasitakamaluppalamiva, saraṃ sabbapāliphullamiva pāricchattakaṃ, tārāmarīcivikasitamiva, gaganatalaṃ siriyā avahasantamiva, byāmappabhāparikkhepavilāsinī cassa dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇamālā ganthetvā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacandamālāya dvattiṃsasūriyamālāya paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacakkavattidvattiṃsasakkadevarājadvattiṃsamahābrahmānaṃ siriṃ siriyā abhibhavantimiva. Tañca pana bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitā bhikkhū sabbeva appicchā santuṭṭhā pavivittā asaṃsaṭṭhā codakā pāpagarahino vattāro vacanakkhamā sīlasampannā samādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiññāṇadassanasampannā. Tesaṃ majjhe bhagavā rattakambalapākāraparikkhitto viya kañcanathambho, rattapadumasaṇḍamajjhagatā viya suvaṇṇanāvā, pavāḷavedikāparikkhitto viya aggikkhandho, tārāgaṇaparivārito viya puṇṇacando migapakkhīnampi cakkhūni pīṇayati, pageva devamanussānaṃ. Tasmiñca pana divase yebhuyyena asītimahātherā meghavaṇṇaṃ paṃsukūlaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karitvā kattaradaṇḍaṃ ādāya suvammavammitā viya gandhahatthino vigatadosā vantadosā bhinnakilesā vijaṭitajaṭā chinnabandhanā bhagavantaṃ parivārayiṃsu. So sayaṃ vītarāgo vītarāgehi, sayaṃ vītadoso vītadosehi, sayaṃ vītamoho vītamohehi, sayaṃ vītataṇho vītataṇhehi, sayaṃ nikkileso nikkilesehi, sayaṃ buddho anubuddhehi parivārito; pattaparivāritaṃ viya kesaraṃ, kesaraparivāritā viya kaṇṇikā, aṭṭhanāgasahassaparivārito viya chaddanto nāgarājā, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, senaṅgaparivārito viya cakkavattirājā, devagaṇaparivārito viya sakko devarājā, brahmagaṇaparivārito viya hārito mahābrahmā, aparimitakālasañcitapuññabalanibbattāya acinteyyāya anopamāya buddhalīlāya cando viya gaganatalaṃ taṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno hoti.
就这样,游方者看见世尊以无与伦比的佛陀威仪行进,诸比丘低垂双目,诸根寂静,内心寂静,如同礼敬悬于高空的满月一般,唯对世尊表示敬意。他回过头看向自己的随从,只见那些随从:担杖上挂着破烂的背筐、三脚杖、孔雀羽毛、陶钵、滤水囊、水瓶等一大堆杂物,背负着种种沉重的资具;他们多嘴多舌,说着“某人的手好看,某人的脚好看”之类的无义语,言语散乱,既不雅致,也不庄严。看到这一幕,他心生悔恨。显示巴利原文
Athevaṃ bhagavantaṃ anopamāya buddhalīlāya gacchantaṃ bhikkhū ca okkhittacakkhū santindriye santamānase uparinabhe ṭhitaṃ puṇṇacandaṃ viya bhagavantaṃyeva namassamāne disvāva paribbājako attano parisaṃ avalokesi. Sā hoti kājadaṇḍake olambetvā gahitoluggaviluggapiṭṭhakatidaṇḍamorapiñchamattikāpattapasibbakakuṇḍikādianekaparikkhārabhārabharitā . ‘‘Asukassa hatthā sobhaṇā, asukassa pādā’’ti evamādiniratthakavacanā mukharā vikiṇṇavācā adassanīyā apāsādikā. Tassa taṃ disvā vippaṭisāro udapādi.
本来此时他应当宣说世尊的功德。然而,这位游方者既因利养恭敬减损,又因徒众流失,所以始终妒忌世尊。原来,只要佛陀尚未出现于世间,外道们便能获得利养恭敬;但佛陀出世之后,他们的利养恭敬便日渐衰减,犹如旭日东升,萤火虫便黯淡无光。并且,当舍利弗与目犍连还在删阇耶座下出家时,游方者们尚有众多徒众;自从他们离去之后,那些徒众也随之四散。正是由于这两个原因,这位游方者一直嫉妒世尊,因此他等于是呕出嫉妒之毒,只说诽谤三宝的话。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Idāni tena bhagavato vaṇṇo vattabbo bhaveyya. Yasmā panesa lābhasakkārahāniyā ceva pakkhahāniyā ca niccampi bhagavantaṃ usūyati. Aññatitthiyānañhi yāva buddho loke nuppajjati, tāvadeva lābhasakkārā nibbattanti, buddhuppādato pana paṭṭhāya parihīnalābhasakkārā honti , sūriyuggamane khajjopanakā viya nissirīkataṃ āpajjanti. Upatissakolitānañca sañjayassa santike pabbajitakāleyeva paribbājakā mahāparisā ahesuṃ, tesu pana pakkantesu sāpi tesaṃ parisā bhinnā. Iti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ paribbājako yasmā niccampi bhagavantaṃ usūyati, tasmā taṃ usūyavisuggāraṃ uggiranto ratanattayassa avaṇṇameva bhāsatīti veditabbo.
2 那时,世尊与比丘僧团一起,在芒果苗圃的王室精舍住了一夜。事情是这样的:世尊以佛陀的威仪渐次前行,到达芒果苗圃的入口。他看了看太阳,心想:“现在已非行路之时,太阳已近西山。”于是,他便在芒果苗圃的王室精舍住了一夜。显示巴利原文
2.Atha kho bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ rājāgārake ekarattivāsaṃ upagacchi saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenāti bhagavā tāya buddhalīlāya gacchamāno anupubbena ambalaṭṭhikādvāraṃ pāpuṇitvā sūriyaṃ oloketvā – ‘‘akālo dāni gantuṃ, atthasamīpaṃ gato sūriyo’’ti ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ rājāgārake ekarattivāsaṃ upagacchi.
此处所说的“芒果苗圃”,是国王的一座园林。据说,园林入口附近有一棵幼小的芒果树,那个地方便被叫做“芒果苗圃”。这座园林就坐落在不远处,因而承袭了此名,也被称为芒果苗圃。园中树荫清凉,水源充足,围墙环绕,门户严整,犹如一座妥善守护的宝库。园内为供国王游乐,建造了一座巧思点缀、富丽堂皇的屋舍,即称为“王室精舍”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ambalaṭṭhikāti rañño uyyānaṃ. Tassa kira dvārasamīpe taruṇaambarukkho atthi, taṃ ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā’’ti vadanti. Tassa avidūre bhavattā uyyānampi ambalaṭṭhikā tveva saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ. Taṃ chāyūdakasampannaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ suyojitadvāraṃ mañjusā viya suguttaṃ. Tattha rañño kīḷanatthaṃ paṭibhānacittavicittaṃ agāraṃ akaṃsu. Taṃ ‘‘rājāgāraka’’nti vuccati.
“须皮耶也是如此”:须皮耶也到了那里。他望了望太阳,心想:“现在已不是赶路的时候了。我的这些随从游方者老老少少为数不少,而且此路险象环生,有盗贼,有凶暴的夜叉,还有猛兽。然而,那位沙门乔达摩已进入园林,凡沙门乔达摩所住之处,诸天都会守护。那么我干脆也在这里歇宿一夜,明天再走。”于是,他也进入了同一座园林。随后,比丘僧团侍奉世尊之后,便各自选好处所安顿下来。那位游方者也带着自己的随众,在园林的一角卸下游方者的资具,安顿下来。不过,依经文记载,则是说:“和他的弟子青年梵授一起。”显示巴利原文
Suppiyopi khoti suppiyopi tasmiṃ ṭhāne sūriyaṃ oloketvā – ‘‘akālo dāni gantuṃ, bahū khuddakamahallakā paribbājakā, bahuparissayo ca ayaṃ maggo corehipi vāḷayakkhehipi vāḷamigehipi. Ayaṃ kho pana samaṇo gotamo uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho, samaṇassa ca gotamassa vasanaṭṭhāne devatā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhanti, handāhampi idha ekarattivāsaṃ upagantvā sveva gamissāmī’’ti tadevuyyānaṃ pāvisi. Tato bhikkhusaṅgho bhagavato vattaṃ dassetvā attano attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhesi. Paribbājakopi uyyānassa ekapasse paribbājakaparikkhāre otāretvā vāsaṃ upagacchi saddhiṃ attano parisāya. Pāḷiyamārūḷhavaseneva pana – ‘‘saddhiṃ attano antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
那位如此安顿下来的游方者,在夜间见到了十力世尊。此时,四处灯火遍布,犹如散落的繁星。世尊端坐中央,比丘僧团围绕而坐。在那里,听不到任何比丘有不安地弄手、动脚的声音,也没有咳嗽或唾痰的声响。这是因为这一会众既严持学处,又对导师深怀恭敬,正因这两种原因,他们犹如无风处的灯焰,纹丝不动,静静坐着。游方者目睹如此庄严的景象,回头看看自己的随众——那些人中,有的挥舞手臂,有的踢蹬腿脚,有的胡言乱语,有的伸长舌头、口水直流,有的切齿磨牙,咯咯作响,还有的正鼾声如雷,沉沉酣睡。他本应赞叹三宝的功德,却出于嫉妒,反而又开始了毁谤。而那位青年梵授,则依照前面说过的方式,发出了赞叹。因此,经中说:“在那里,须皮耶游方者……”等语,都应如此理解。经中的“在那里”,即指在那芒果苗圃的园林中。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vāsaṃ upagato pana so paribbājako rattibhāge dasabalaṃ olokesi. Tasmiñca samaye samantā vippakiṇṇatārakā viya padīpā jalanti, majjhe bhagavā nisinno hoti, bhikkhusaṅgho ca bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā. Tattha ekabhikkhussapi hatthakukkuccaṃ vā pādakukkuccaṃ vā ukkāsitasaddo vā khipitasaddo vā natthi. Sā hi parisā attano ca sikkhitasikkhatāya satthari ca gāravenāti dvīhi kāraṇehi nivāte padīpasikhā viya niccalā sannisinnāva ahosi. Paribbājako taṃ vibhūtiṃ disvā attano parisaṃ olokesi. Tattha keci hatthaṃ khipanti, keci pādaṃ, keci vippalapanti, keci nillālitajivhā paggharitakheḷā, dante khādantā kākacchamānā gharugharupassāsino sayanti. So ratanattayassa guṇavaṇṇe vattabbepi issāvasena puna avaṇṇameva ārabhi. Brahmadatto pana vuttanayeneva vaṇṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tatrāpi sudaṃ suppiyo paribbājako’’ti sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Tattha tatrāpīti tasmimpi, ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ uyyāneti attho.
3 「众多」:即许多位。依律藏的判定,三人即可称为「众多」,逾此则为僧团。然依经藏的判定,从三人以上始称众多。此处当依经藏之义,解为「众多」。
「圆堂」:有时指架有两根房脊、覆以雁羽般层叠瓦片的尖顶屋,也称为圆堂。有时指撑有一根顶心柱、周列环绕柱子的集会大堂,也称为圆堂。但此处则指那座坐卧休息的大堂,应理解为圆堂。
「共坐」:意谓以安坐的方式同聚一处。
「聚集」:意谓以会合的方式共集一处。
「生起如是论议之语」:「论议」指谈论,「论议之语」即他们所谈论的话题。「生起」即产生。那么,是怎样的论议呢?正是「真是稀有啊,贤友!」这类的话。
其中,「稀有」:如同盲人攀登高山,是极其难得、不常发生之事,故名稀有。此是依构词法说。而依此间注疏家的解释:值得击节称叹的,即是稀有,意为此事令人为之击节赞叹。「前所未有而竟然出现」,便名奇异。这两者,都是用以表达惊异与赞叹。显示巴利原文
3.Sambahulānanti bahukānaṃ. Tattha vinayapariyāyena tayo janā ‘‘sambahulā’’ti vuccanti. Tato paraṃ saṅgho. Suttantapariyāyena pana tayo tayova tato paṭṭhāya sambahulā. Idha suttantapariyāyena ‘‘sambahulā’’ti veditabbā. Maṇḍalamāḷeti katthaci dve kaṇṇikā gahetvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena katā kūṭāgārasālāpi ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷo’’ti vuccati, katthaci ekaṃ kaṇṇikaṃ gahetvā thambhapantiṃ parikkhipitvā katā upaṭṭhānasālāpi ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷo’’ti vuccati. Idha pana nisīdanasālā ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷo’’ti veditabbo. Sannisinnānanti nisajjanavasena. Sannipatitānanti samodhānavasena. Ayaṃ saṅkhiyadhammoti saṅkhiyā vuccati kathā , kathādhammoti attho. Udapādīti uppanno. Katamo pana soti? Acchariyaṃ āvusoti evamādi. Tattha andhassa pabbatārohaṇaṃ viya niccaṃ na hotīti acchariyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva saddanayo. Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathānayo – accharāyogganti acchariyaṃ. Accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttanti attho. Abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtanti abbhutaṃ. Ubhayaṃ petaṃ vimhayassevādhivacanaṃ. Yāvañcidanti yāva ca idaṃ tena suppaṭividitatāya appameyyattaṃ dasseti.
「彼世尊……知悉……善巧通达」:此处略释其义。彼世尊,圆满三十种波罗蜜,摧破一切烦恼,证得无上正等正觉——正是这样一位世尊。他对诸有情的根性、随眠悉皆了知,对于一切所知法,犹如观掌中余甘子果,清晰照见。显示巴利原文
Tena bhagavatā jānatā…pe… suppaṭividitāti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho. Yo so bhagavā samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tena bhagavatā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayaṃ jānatā, hatthatale ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya sabbañeyyadhammaṃ passatā.
再者,是以宿命智等而了知者,以天眼而照见者。是以三明或六通而了知者,以遍一切处而无碍的周遍眼照见者。是以能了知一切法的智慧了知者,以极其清净的肉眼照见一切众生眼识所不及的墙外等处色法者。或者,是以成就自利、以定为近因的证悟慧而了知者,以成就利他、以大悲为近因的教说慧而照见者。显示巴利原文
Api ca pubbenivāsādīhi jānatā, dibbena cakkhunā passatā. Tīhi vijjāhi chahi vā pana abhiññāhi jānatā, sabbattha appaṭihatena samantacakkhunā passatā. Sabbadhammajānanasamatthāya vā paññāya jānatā, sabbasattānaṃ cakkhuvisayātītāni tirokuṭṭādigatānipi rūpāni ativisuddhena maṃsacakkhunā passatā. Attahitasādhikāya vā samādhipadaṭṭhānāya paṭivedhapaññāya jānatā, parahitasādhikāya karuṇāpadaṭṭhānāya desanāpaññāya passatā.
由于杀灭了烦恼敌,且堪受资具等供养,故为阿拉汉;由于正确地、亲自地觉悟了一切法,故为正自觉者。即:通过了知障碍法、照见导向出离法,以杀灭烦恼敌而为阿拉汉;通过正确地、亲自地觉悟一切法而为正自觉者。如此,以这四种无所畏之四种方式受到赞叹的世尊,对于众生种种意乐、种种倾向,已经善巧通达,乃至极为善巧通达。显示巴利原文
Arīnaṃ hatattā paccayādīnañca arahattā arahatā. Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhena antarāyikadhamme vā jānatā, niyyānikadhamme passatā, kilesārīnaṃ hatattā arahatā. Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhenāti. Evaṃ catūvesārajjavasena catūhākārehi thomitena sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatā nānajjhāsayatā suppaṭividitā yāva ca suṭṭhu paṭividitā.
为显示世尊对此透彻了知,所以说“这些”等语。意思是:世尊如此了知——“诸比丘,众生依界聚会,志向低劣者与志向低劣者相聚,志向高尚者与志向高尚者相聚。诸比丘,过去世众生也是依界相聚……未来世……现在世……”如是,众生有种种志向、种种意欲、种种见解、种种忍受、种种喜好,世尊以知种种志向智及一切知智,如同用斗量、用秤称一般,透彻了知。即使只有两个众生,世间也难有完全相同的意欲。一个想走,另一个想停;一个想喝,另一个想吃。这在这位老师和弟子身上正得以体现:“而善觉外道……紧随世尊和比丘僧团之后。”这里“如是这些”,即“这些如此”。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
Idānissa suppaṭividitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ayañhītiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti yā ca ayaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘dhātuso, bhikkhave, sattā saṃsandanti samenti, hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samenti, kalyāṇādhimuttikā kalyāṇādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samenti. Atītampi kho, bhikkhave, addhānaṃ dhātusova sattā saṃsandiṃsu samiṃsu, hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttikehi…pe… kalyāṇādhimuttikā kalyāṇādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandiṃsu samiṃsu, anāgatampi kho, bhikkhave, addhānaṃ…pe… saṃsandissanti samessanti, etarahipi kho, bhikkhave, paccuppannaṃ addhānaṃ dhātusova sattā saṃsandanti samenti, hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttikehi…pe… kalyāṇādhimuttikā kalyāṇādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samentī’’ti evaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatā, nānajjhāsayatā, nānādiṭṭhikatā, nānākhantitā, nānārucitā, nāḷiyā minantena viya tulāya tulayantena viya ca nānādhimuttikatāñāṇena sabbaññutaññāṇena viditā, sā yāva suppaṭividitā. Dvepi nāma sattā ekajjhāsayā dullabhā lokasmiṃ. Ekasmiṃ gantukāme eko ṭhātukāmo hoti, ekasmiṃ pivitukāme eko bhuñjitukāmo. Imesu cāpi dvīsu ācariyantevāsīsu ayañhi ‘‘suppiyo paribbājako…pe… bhagavantaṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañcā’’ti. Tattha itihameti itiha ime, evaṃ imeti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
4 此处“了知”是以一切知智了知。世尊有时以肉眼看见而了知——如“世尊看见一根大木头被恒河水流冲走”等;有时以天眼看见而了知——如“世尊以清净超人的天眼,看见那些天神在华氏城各自占取宅地”等;有时以普通耳闻而了知——如“世尊听闻具寿阿难与须跋陀罗外道之间如此这样的谈话”等;有时以天耳界听闻而了知——如“世尊以清净超人的天耳界,听闻商主居士与尼拘律外道之间如此这样的谈话”等。然而在此,世尊是以一切知智听闻而了知。他是在做什么事的时候了知的呢?是在做后夜分应做事的时候。事有两种:有益的事与无益的事。其中,无益的事世尊在菩提座时即以阿拉汉道彻底断除了,因此世尊所做的唯有有益的事。有益的事有五种:食前事、午后事、初夜分事、中夜分事、后夜分事。显示巴利原文
4.Atha kho bhagavā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ imaṃ saṅkhiyadhammaṃ viditvāti ettha viditvāti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitvā. Bhagavā hi katthaci maṃsacakkhunā disvā jānāti – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) viya. Katthaci dibbacakkhunā disvā jānāti – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena tā devatāyo sahassasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni parigaṇhantiyo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.152) viya. Katthaci pakatisotena sutvā jānāti – ‘‘assosi kho bhagavā āyasmato ānandassa subhaddena paribbājakena saddhiṃ imaṃ kathāsallāpa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.213) viya. Katthaci dibbasotena sutvā jānāti – ‘‘assosi kho bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya sandhānassa gahapatissa nigrodhena paribbājakena saddhiṃ imaṃ kathāsallāpa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.54) viya. Idha pana sabbaññutaññāṇena sutvā aññāsi. Kiṃ karonto aññāsi? Pacchimayāmakiccaṃ, kiccañca nāmetaṃ sātthakaṃ, niratthakanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha niratthakakiccaṃ bhagavatā bodhipallaṅkeyeva arahattamaggena samugghātaṃ kataṃ. Sātthakaṃyeva pana bhagavato kiccaṃ hoti. Taṃ pañcavidhaṃ – purebhattakiccaṃ, pacchābhattakiccaṃ, purimayāmakiccaṃ, majjhimayāmakiccaṃ, pacchimayāmakiccanti.
其中,食前事如下:显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ purebhattakiccaṃ –
世尊清晨起来,为摄受侍者、让身体舒适,先洗脸等整理身体,之后在空闲处度过,直至乞食时分。到了乞食时,穿上下衣,系好腰带,披上袈裟,执持钵盂,有时独行,有时由比丘僧团围绕,进入村落或城镇乞食:有时以平常方式,有时则现种种神通。也就是说,当世间怙主入村乞食时,柔和清风在前拂扫道路,云朵降下细雨,平息路上尘土,并在上空形成伞盖;又有风吹来花朵,撒于路面;高处自然降低,低处自然升高;每当踏足,地面都化成平坦,如莲花般柔嫩的花朵承托双足。刚跨过门槛,右脚落下,身体便放射六色光芒,如金丝织成的笼网,又如披覆绚丽的彩帛,美饰殿堂楼阁,流散四方;大象、马、鸟等各在所处发出美妙之声;同样,鼓、琴等乐器以及人们佩戴的饰物也自然鸣响。凭借这些瑞相,众人便知:『今天世尊进入这里乞食了。』于是他们穿好下衣与上衣,持着香、花等物走出家门,列于街道两旁,恭敬地以香花等供养世尊,顶礼之后请求说:『尊者,请允许我们供养十位比丘、二十位、五十位……乃至一百位比丘。』便接过世尊的钵。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā hi pātova uṭṭhāya upaṭṭhākānuggahatthaṃ sarīraphāsukatthañca mukhadhovanādisarīraparikammaṃ katvā yāva bhikkhācāravelā tāva vivittāsane vītināmetvā, bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattamādāya kadāci ekako, kadāci bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisati; kadāci pakatiyā, kadāci anekehi pāṭihāriyehi vattamānehi. Seyyathidaṃ, piṇḍāya pavisato lokanāthassa purato purato gantvā mudugatavātā pathaviṃ sodhenti, valāhakā udakaphusitāni muñcantā magge reṇuṃ vūpasametvā upari vitānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhanti, apare vātā pupphāni upasaṃharitvā magge okiranti, unnatā bhūmippadesā onamanti, onatā unnamanti, pādanikkhepasamaye samāva bhūmi hoti, sukhasamphassāni padumapupphāni vā pāde sampaṭicchanti. Indakhīlassa anto ṭhapitamatte dakkhiṇapāde sarīrato chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāni viya citrapaṭaparikkhittāni viya ca pāsādakūṭāgārādīni alaṅkarontiyo ito cito ca dhāvanti, hatthiassavihaṅgādayo sakasakaṭṭhānesu ṭhitāyeva madhurenākārena saddaṃ karonti, tathā bherivīṇādīni tūriyāni manussānañca kāyūpagāni ābharaṇāni. Tena saññāṇena manussā jānanti – ‘‘ajja bhagavā idha piṇḍāya paviṭṭho’’ti. Te sunivatthā supārutā gandhapupphādīni ādāya gharā nikkhamitvā antaravīthiṃ paṭipajjitvā bhagavantaṃ gandhapupphādīhi sakkaccaṃ pūjetvā vanditvā – ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante, dasa bhikkhū, amhākaṃ vīsati, paññāsaṃ…pe… sataṃ dethā’’ti yācitvā bhagavatopi pattaṃ gahetvā āsanaṃ paññapetvā sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātena paṭimānenti. Bhagavā katabhattakicco tesaṃ sattānaṃ cittasantānāni oloketvā tathā dhammaṃ deseti, yathā keci saraṇagamanesu patiṭṭhahanti, keci pañcasu sīlesu, keci sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiphalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ; keci pabbajitvā aggaphale arahatteti. Evaṃ mahājanaṃ anuggahetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ gacchati. Tattha gantvā maṇḍalamāḷe paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīdati, bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosānaṃ āgamayamāno. Tato bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosāne upaṭṭhāko bhagavato nivedeti. Atha bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisati. Idaṃ tāva purebhattakiccaṃ.
世尊如此办完食前事后,在香室的侍候处坐下,洗净双足,站于脚凳之上,教诫比丘僧团说:『比丘们,应以不放逸而成就!佛陀出现于世甚为稀有,获得人身甚难,具足圆满的机缘甚难,出家甚难,听闻正法亦甚难。』此时,有些比丘向世尊请教禅修业处。世尊便随其各自根性,授予相宜的业处。随后,所有比丘顶礼世尊之后,便各自前往自己过夜或白昼停留之处:有的去森林,有的去树下,有的去山中各处,有的往四天王天宫……乃至他化自在天宫。然后,世尊进入香室,若想休息,便取右胁而卧,保持正念正知,如狮子卧姿态,安卧片刻。身体得以舒适后,世尊便起身,于第二时分观察世间。第三时分,凡是世尊所住的村庄或城镇,大众在午前布施食物后,午后穿戴整齐,持着香、花等物品,聚集到精舍来。这时,世尊便以适合会众的神通前往法堂,坐于铺设好的殊胜佛座上,应时宜而宣说佛法。知道适可,便令大众散去。众人顶礼世尊而后离去。上述即午后事。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā evaṃ katapurebhattakicco gandhakuṭiyā upaṭṭhāne nisīditvā pāde pakkhāletvā pādapīṭhe ṭhatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ovadati – ‘‘bhikkhave, appamādena sampādetha, dullabho buddhuppādo lokasmiṃ, dullabho manussattapaṭilābho, dullabhā sampatti, dullabhā pabbajjā, dullabhaṃ saddhammassavana’’nti. Tattha keci bhagavantaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchanti. Bhagavāpi tesaṃ cariyānurūpaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Tato sabbepi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni gacchanti. Keci araññaṃ, keci rukkhamūlaṃ, keci pabbatādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, keci cātumahārājikabhavanaṃ…pe… keci vasavattibhavananti. Tato bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā sace ākaṅkhati, dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno muhuttaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti. Atha samassāsitakāyo vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyabhāge lokaṃ voloketi. Tatiyabhāge yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati tattha mahājano purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā pacchābhattaṃ sunivattho supāruto gandhapupphādīni ādāya vihāre sannipatati. Tato bhagavā sampattaparisāya anurūpena pāṭihāriyena gantvā dhammasabhāyaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisajja dhammaṃ deseti kālayuttaṃ samayayuttaṃ, atha kālaṃ viditvā parisaṃ uyyojeti, manussā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkamanti. Idaṃ pacchābhattakiccaṃ.
世尊完成午后事务后,如果想沐浴,便从佛座起身,进入浴堂,用侍者准备好的水沐浴,使身体温暖舒适。侍者将佛座搬来,铺设在香室的走廊前。世尊穿上那件染成妙色的郁多罗僧衣,系好腰带,偏袒右肩,到那里独自端坐,静默片刻。此时,比丘们从各处前来拜见世尊。他们中,有的请问问题,有的请求业处,有的希求听法。世尊便满足他们的愿望,如此度过初夜分。这就是初夜分所行。显示巴利原文
So evaṃ niṭṭhitapacchābhattakicco sace gattāni osiñcitukāmo hoti, buddhāsanā vuṭṭhāya nhānakoṭṭhakaṃ pavisitvā upaṭṭhākena paṭiyāditaudakena gattāni utuṃ gaṇhāpeti. Upaṭṭhākopi buddhāsanaṃ ānetvā gandhakuṭipariveṇe paññapeti. Bhagavā surattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā uttarāsaṅgaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karitvā tattha gantvā nisīdati ekakova muhuttaṃ paṭisallīno, atha bhikkhū tato tato āgamma bhagavato upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchanti. Tattha ekacce pañhaṃ pucchanti, ekacce kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ekacce dhammassavanaṃ yācanti. Bhagavā tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ sampādento purimayāmaṃ vītināmeti. Idaṃ purimayāmakiccaṃ.
初夜分事结束,比丘们顶礼世尊而离去后,整个一万世界界中的诸天神便得到机会,来到世尊跟前请问问题,有的问题甚至只有短短四个音节。世尊为诸天神解答问题,以此度过中夜分。这就是中夜分所行。显示巴利原文
Purimayāmakiccapariyosāne pana bhikkhūsu bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkantesu sakaladasasahassilokadhātudevatāyo okāsaṃ labhamānā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchanti, yathābhisaṅkhataṃ antamaso caturakkharampi. Bhagavā tāsaṃ devatānaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjento majjhimayāmaṃ vītināmeti. Idaṃ majjhimayāmakiccaṃ.
后夜分则分为三部分:为了解除从食前起久坐所带来的身体疲劳,世尊以经行度过第一部分;第二部分,进入香室,右胁而卧,保持正念正知,作狮子卧;第三部分,起身端坐,以佛眼观察世间,为见那些在过去诸佛面前曾行布施、持戒等功德的人们。这就是后夜分所行。显示巴利原文
Pacchimayāmaṃ pana tayo koṭṭhāse katvā purebhattato paṭṭhāya nisajjāya pīḷitassa sarīrassa kilāsubhāvamocanatthaṃ ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ caṅkamena vītināmeti. Dutiyakoṭṭhāse gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti. Tatiyakoṭṭhāse paccuṭṭhāya nisīditvā purimabuddhānaṃ santike dānasīlādivasena katādhikārapuggaladassanatthaṃ buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketi. Idaṃ pacchimayāmakiccaṃ.
而就在那一天,世尊在王舍城办完食前之事,食后便启程上路。初夜分,他为比丘们讲说业处;中夜分,解答诸天所问;后夜分,则登上经行道经行。经行时,他以一切知智听到了五百位比丘关于一切知智的谈论,更以一切知智了知了此事。因此说到:‘他于履行后夜分的事务时,便了知了这件事。’显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana divase bhagavā purebhattakiccaṃ rājagahe pariyosāpetvā pacchābhatte maggaṃ āgato, purimayāme bhikkhūnaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā, majjhimayāme devatānaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjetvā, pacchimayāme caṅkamaṃ āruyha caṅkamamāno pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ imaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbha pavattaṃ kathaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇeneva sutvā aññāsīti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pacchimayāmakiccaṃ karonto aññāsī’’ti.
了知此事后,他心中思惟:‘这些比丘正在赞叹我一切知智的功德,然于一切知智的作用,他们并不了然,唯我自知。待我离去后,他们定会继续谈论此事。我当以此为缘起,分别开演三聚净戒,于六十二处作不退转的狮子吼,将缘起之理融会贯通,令佛陀的功德昭然显现——犹如举起须弥山,又如以金山之峰撞击虚空,震动一万世界,以阿罗汉果为极致,以讲说《梵网经》为终结。如此,即便在我般涅槃之后,我的这一教说也能于五千年间,引导众生证入不死的大涅槃。’这样思惟后,便向圆堂走去。‘由何处’:指从哪个方向、何处而来。或此处‘由何处’为处格,意指‘于彼处有圆堂,彼便往彼处’。此即本义。显示巴利原文
Ñatvā ca panassa etadahosi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mayhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbha guṇaṃ kathenti, etesañca sabbaññutaññāṇakiccaṃ na pākaṭaṃ, mayhameva pākaṭaṃ. Mayi pana gate ete attano kathaṃ nirantaraṃ ārocessanti, tato nesaṃ ahaṃ taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā tividhaṃ sīlaṃ vibhajanto, dvāsaṭṭhiyā ṭhānesu appaṭivattiyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadanto, paccayākāraṃ samodhānetvā buddhaguṇe pākaṭe katvā, sineruṃ ukkhipento viya suvaṇṇakūṭena nabhaṃ paharanto viya ca dasasahassilokadhātukampanaṃ brahmajālasuttantaṃ arahattanikūṭena niṭṭhāpento desessāmi, sā me desanā parinibbutassāpi pañcavassasahassāni sattānaṃ amatamahānibbānaṃ sampāpikā bhavissatī’’ti. Evaṃ cintetvā yena maṇḍalamāḷo tenupasaṅkamīti . Yenāti yena disābhāgena, so upasaṅkamitabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, yasmiṃ padese so maṇḍalamāḷo, tattha gatoti ayamettha attho.
‘于所敷设座上坐下’:据说,佛陀在世时,凡有比丘居住之处,哪怕仅有一位,也必定会敷设佛座。何以故?因为世尊对于那些从自己面前领受业处后,前往适宜处安住者,会这样作意:‘某甲从我面前领受业处而去,他能否证得殊胜成就?’当他见到那位比丘舍弃业处、思惟不善寻时,便心想:‘这位善男子在我这样的导师跟前领受业处而住,竟被不善寻所胜,将流转于无始轮回之苦!’为了摄受他,世尊便亲自现身于彼处,教导那位善男子后腾空而去,再回到自己的住处。如此,那些受教的比丘们便会想:‘导师了知我等心意,故而前来,显现于我等面前。’在那样的时刻,若再寻找座位、说道‘尊者,请坐此处,请坐此处’,反成累赘。因此,比丘们总是预先敷设好座位,然后才安住。有凳子的人就铺设凳子,没有凳子的人就铺设床板、木板、木块、石块或沙堆。若连这些都得不到,便收集枯叶,将粪扫衣铺于其上安设。而在此处,唯有国王的坐具,比丘们将其拍打洁净、铺设妥当之后,便围绕世尊而坐,发出赞叹。显示巴利原文
Paññatte āsane nisīdīti buddhakāle kira yattha yattha ekopi bhikkhu viharati sabbattha buddhāsanaṃ paññattameva hoti. Kasmā? Bhagavā kira attano santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā phāsukaṭṭhāne viharante manasi karoti – ‘‘asuko mayhaṃ santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gato, sakkhissati nu kho visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ no vā’’ti. Atha naṃ passati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā akusalavitakkaṃ vitakkayamānaṃ, tato ‘‘kathañhi nāma mādisassa satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā viharantaṃ imaṃ kulaputtaṃ akusalavitakkā abhibhavitvā anamatagge vaṭṭadukkhe saṃsāressantī’’ti tassa anuggahatthaṃ tattheva attānaṃ dassetvā taṃ kulaputtaṃ ovaditvā ākāsaṃ uppatitvā puna attano vasanaṭṭhānameva gacchati. Athevaṃ ovadiyamānā te bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘satthā amhākaṃ manaṃ jānitvā āgantvā amhākaṃ samīpe ṭhitaṃyeva attānaṃ dasseti’’. Tasmiṃ khaṇe – ‘‘bhante, idha nisīdatha, idha nisīdathā’’ti āsanapariyesanaṃ nāma bhāroti. Te āsanaṃ paññapetvāva viharanti. Yassa pīṭhaṃ atthi, so taṃ paññapeti. Yassa natthi, so mañcaṃ vā phalakaṃ vā kaṭṭhaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā vālukapuñjaṃ vā paññapeti. Taṃ alabhamānā purāṇapaṇṇānipi saṅkaḍḍhitvā tattha paṃsukūlaṃ pattharitvā ṭhapenti. Idha pana rañño nisīdanāsanameva atthi, taṃ papphoṭetvā paññapetvā parivāretvā te bhikkhū bhagavato adhimuttikañāṇamārabbha guṇaṃ thomayamānā nisīdiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti.
世尊坐下后,虽心知肚明,但为开启话题,仍向比丘们询问。比丘们便将一切禀告了他。因此经中说:“世尊坐下后”等。其中,“以何而聚坐”(kāya nuttha)的意思是:“你们是因何话题而聚集就坐的呢?”也有读作“以何而在此”(kāya nettha),意为:“你们为何在此呢?”还有读作“以何而住”(kāya nottha),意思与前者相同。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nisinno pana jānantoyeva kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ bhikkhū pucchi. Te cassa sabbaṃ kathayiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘nisajja kho bhagavā’’tiādi. Tattha kāya nutthāti katamāya nu kathāya sannisinnā bhavathāti attho. Kāya netthātipi pāḷi, tassā katamāya nu etthāti attho kāya notthātipi pāḷi. Tassāpi purimoyeva attho.
“中断的话题”(antarākathā):是指在业处作意、教导、问难等过程中,生起的另一种话题。“被打断的”(vippakatā):指因我到来,话题未能完成、未达顶点。这说明了什么?“我并非为打断你们的话题而来,而是以一切知智而来,要将你们的话题圆满完成,使其达到顶点。”世尊就这样坐着,宣示了一切知智的许可。此外,“尊者,我们的这个中断的话题才被打断,世尊就来到了”这句话,也含有这样的意思:“尊者,我们这关于世尊一切知智功德的话题尚未结束,并非王论之类的畜生论;正当此时世尊到来。请您现在为我们把它圆满完成并开示吧。”显示巴利原文
Antarākathāti , kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīnaṃ antarā aññā ekā kathā. Vippakatāti, mama āgamanapaccayā apariniṭṭhitā sikhaṃ appattā. Tena kiṃ dasseti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ tumhākaṃ kathābhaṅgatthaṃ āgato, ahaṃ pana sabbaññutāya tumhākaṃ kathaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā matthakappattaṃ katvā dassāmīti āgato’’ti nisajjeva sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāreti. Ayaṃ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā , atha bhagavā anuppattoti etthāpi ayamadhippāyo. Ayaṃ bhante amhākaṃ bhagavato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbha guṇakathā vippakatā, na rājakathādikā tiracchānakathā, atha bhagavā anuppatto; taṃ no idāni niṭṭhāpetvā desethāti.
至此,由阿难尊者所宣说的这一序言,其特征好比:为顺利进入那绽放红莲青莲、水清味甘的池塘,而用无瑕石板铺设的庄严宝石阶梯;为轻易登上那仿佛触及星宿、高耸向天的华丽殿堂,而用象牙制成平滑柔软的梯板、饰以金藤与璀璨宝石的阶梯;为顺利进入那回响着金镯踝环等碰撞声、夹杂谈笑与欢悦、有家人往来其间、以大威势与富饶庄严的大宅,而用金、银、摩尼、珍珠、珊瑚等光芒照耀、安稳建立的宽阔大门。此序言具足义理与音韵,为显示佛陀功德的威力而宣说,并以时节、地点、说法者、事由、众会、教示等庄严,令此经易于领悟。其义注释已告结束。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca yaṃ āyasmatā ānandena kamalakuvalayujjalavimalasādhurasasalilāya pokkharaṇiyā sukhāvataraṇatthaṃ nimmalasilātalaracanavilāsasobhitaratanasopānaṃ, vippakiṇṇamuttātalasadisavālukākiṇṇapaṇḍarabhūmibhāgaṃ titthaṃ viya suvibhattabhittivicitravedikāparikkhittassa nakkhattapathaṃ phusitukāmatāya viya, vijambhitasamussayassa pāsādavarassa sukhārohaṇatthaṃ dantamayasaṇhamuduphalakakañcanalatāvinaddhamaṇigaṇappabhāsamudayujjalasobhaṃ sopānaṃ viya, suvaṇṇavalayanūpurādisaṅghaṭṭanasaddasammissitakathitahasitamadhurassaragehajanavicaritassa uḷārissarivibhavasobhitassa mahāgharassa sukhappavesanatthaṃ suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttapavāḷādijutivissaravijjotitasuppatiṭṭhitavisāladvārabāhaṃ mahādvāraṃ viya ca atthabyañjanasampannassa buddhaguṇānubhāvasaṃsūcakassa imassa suttassa sukhāvagahaṇatthaṃ kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ, tassatthavaṇṇanā samattāti.
5 现在,正是对世尊以“诸比丘,若有人诽谤我……”等方式所安立的这部经进行注释的时候了。这便是经的注释。因为只有在审察了经的安立方式之后加以解说,注释才会明了清晰,所以我们先来审察经的安立。经的安立方式有四种:依自己的意愿、依他人的意愿、随问而答、依事而生起。显示巴利原文
5. Idāni – ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa vaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā suttavaṇṇanā. Yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicārayissāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā – attajjhāsayo, parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasiko, aṭṭhuppattikoti.
其中,有一些经并非由于他人祈请,而是世尊纯粹出于自己的内心意愿所讲说的。例如《希望经》、《衣经》、《大念处经》、《大六处分别经》、《圣种经》、《正勤经摄颂》,以及《神足、根、力、觉支、道支经摄颂》等。这些经的安立方式,便是依自己的意愿。显示巴利原文
Tattha yāni suttāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva kathesi; seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ, vatthasuttaṃ, mahāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, mahāsaḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ, ariyavaṃsasuttaṃ, sammappadhānasuttantahārako, iddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgasuttantahārakoti evamādīni; tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
另有一些经,是观察了他人内心的意愿、意乐、志向、导引以及觉悟的可能性之后,依他人的意愿而开示的。例如,观察到:“罗睺罗的解脱资粮之法已然成熟,我现在应当更进一步教导罗睺罗灭尽诸漏了”,由此而说的《小罗睺罗教诫经》、《大罗睺罗教诫经》、《转法轮经》、《界分别经》等。这些经的安立方式,便是依他人的意愿。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā; yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttariṃ āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti; (saṃ. ni. 4.121) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ manaṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca avekkhitvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni; seyyathidaṃ, cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṃ, mahārāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, dhātuvibhaṅgasuttanti evamādīni; tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
又有四众、四姓、龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、阿修罗、夜叉、四大王天、三十三天等诸天及大梵天等,来到世尊面前,提问说:‘尊者,请说觉支’、‘尊者,请说盖’、‘尊者,这些就是五取蕴吗?’,或者以‘世间什么才是人最上等的财富?’等方式发问。世尊据此开示了《觉支相应》等经,以及《天相应》、《魔相应》、《梵相应》、《帝释所问》、《小吠陀罗》、《大吠陀罗》、《沙门果经》、《旷野夜叉经》、《针毛夜叉经》、《佉罗夜叉经》等,这些经的安立是随问而答。显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā catasso parisā, cattāro vaṇṇā, nāgā, supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, asurā, yakkhā, mahārājāno, tāvatiṃsādayo devā, mahābrahmāti evamādayo – ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti. ‘‘Nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti; ‘‘ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā’’. ‘‘Kiṃ sūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādinā nayena pañhaṃ pucchanti. Evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni, yāni vā panaññānipi devatāsaṃyutta-mārasaṃyutta-brahmasaṃyutta-sakkapañha-cūḷavedalla-mahāvedalla-sāmaññaphala-āḷavaka-sūciloma-kharalomasuttādīni; tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
而那些因某件事情的因缘而宣说的经,例如《法嗣经》、《小狮子吼经》、《月喻经》、《子肉喻经》、《大树干喻经》、《火聚喻经》、《泡沫团喻经》、《珊瑚树喻经》等,这些经的安立是依事而生。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana tāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – dhammadāyādaṃ, cūḷasīhanādaṃ, candūpamaṃ, puttamaṃsūpamaṃ, dārukkhandhūpamaṃ, aggikkhandhūpamaṃ, pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ, pāricchattakūpamanti evamādīni; tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
在这四种安立中,此经的安立是依事而生。这是因为世尊乃依某事的因缘而安立此经。是依哪件事的因缘呢?是关于诽谤与称赞的事。一位外道老师宣说了对三宝的诽谤,而他的弟子却宣说了对三宝的称赞。善于教导的世尊便以这诽谤与称赞之事为因缘,开始了‘诸比丘,若有人诽谤我……’等的教导。其中,‘我’(mamaṃ)是属格词,意为‘我的’;‘或’(vā)是分别词;‘他人’(pare)指怀有敌意的众生;‘在其中’(tattha)指在那些说诽谤话的人当中。显示巴利原文
Evametesu catūsu nikkhepesu imassa suttassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Aṭṭhuppattiyā hi idaṃ bhagavatā nikkhittaṃ. Katarāya aṭṭhuppattiyā? Vaṇṇāvaṇṇe. Ācariyo ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, antevāsī vaṇṇaṃ. Iti imaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā desanākusalo bhagavā – ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha mamanti , sāmivacanaṃ, mamāti attho. Vāsaddo vikappanattho. Pareti, paṭiviruddhā sattā. Tatrāti ye avaṇṇaṃ vadanti tesu.
“无嗔”等语句:虽然那些比丘确实没有嗔,但为了防止未来的善男子们在类似情形中生起不善,世尊还是建立了法导。其中,伤害其心的状态,名为“嗔”;这是忿怒的同义词。因此而不悦、不欣喜的状态,名为“不悦”;这是忧的同义词。既不能成就自利,也不能成就他利的状态,名为“无成”;这也是忿怒的同义词。如此,此处以两个名词标示行蕴,以一个名词标示受蕴,所以说了两个蕴;凭借这两个蕴的力量,其余相应法的生起因缘便被遮止。显示巴利原文
Na āghātotiādīhi kiñcāpi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āghātoyeva natthi, atha kho āyatiṃ kulaputtānaṃ īdisesupi ṭhānesu akusaluppattiṃ paṭisedhento dhammanettiṃ ṭhapeti. Tattha āhanati cittanti ‘āghāto’; kopassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassikāti appaccayo; domanassassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Neva attano na paresaṃ hitaṃ abhirādhayatīti anabhiraddhi; kopassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Evamettha dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandhoti dve khandhā vuttā. Tesaṃ vasena sesānampi sampayuttadhammānaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭikkhittameva.
这样,以第一种方式制止了心的嗔之后,再以第二种方式显示其中的过患,世尊说:“若你们在那里忿怒或不悦,那将成为你们自己的障碍。”其中,“若你们在那里”的意思是:如果你们对那些诽谤者,或者对那诽谤本身,有了那样的状态——如果你们成了那样。“忿怒”即出于忿怒,“不悦”即出于忧。“那将成为你们自己的障碍”:由于那种忿怒和那种不悦,这将成为你们自己证得初禅等的障碍。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamena nayena manopadosaṃ nivāretvā, dutiyena nayena tattha ādīnavaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā vā anattamanā vā, tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’’ti. Tattha ‘tatra ce tumhe assathā’ti tesu avaṇṇabhāsakesu, tasmiṃ vā avaṇṇe tumhe bhaveyyātha ce; yadi bhaveyyāthāti attho. ‘Kupitā’ kopena, anattamanā domanassena. ‘Tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’ti tumhākaṃyeva tena kopena, tāya ca anattamanatāya paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo bhaveyya.
如此,以第二种方式显示了过患后,又以第三种方式显示他们甚至没有能力辨别言辞的意思,因此说:“你们又能了知他人……”等。其中,“他人”指某些人。因为忿怒的人,对于佛陀、独觉佛、圣弟子、父母,乃至敌对者所说的善说或恶说,都不能了知其义理。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dutiyena nayena ādīnavaṃ dassetvā, tatiyena nayena vacanatthasallakkhaṇamattepi asamatthataṃ dassento – ‘‘api nu tumhe paresa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha paresanti yesaṃ kesaṃ ci. Kupito hi neva buddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakānaṃ, na mātāpitūnaṃ, na paccatthikānaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitassa atthaṃ ājānāti. Yathāha –
忿怒者不知义理,忿怒者不见法;
当人被忿怒征服时,他便陷入盲目的黑暗。
忿怒招致无益,忿怒扰动心念;
内心所生的恐惧,世人却不觉知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ kodho sahate naraṃ. Anatthajanano kodho, kodho cittappakopano; Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhatī’’ti. (a. ni. 7.64);
如此,以种种方式制止了对毁谤所起的心嗔之后,为显示应行之道,世尊说:“于此,你们应将不实当作不实……”等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbathāpi avaṇṇe manopadosaṃ nisedhetvā idāni paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassento – ‘‘tatra tumhehi abhūtaṃ abhūtato’’tiādimāha.
其中,“于此,你们”是指在面对那些毁谤时,你们。“应将不实按不实驳斥”:即应把那不实之事,就其不实而予以破除。如何做呢?通过“这件事是不实的”等方法。此处其关联为:当听到“你们的导师不是一切知者、法未善说、僧伽未善修行”等时,不应沉默。而应当这样说:“此事不实——你们所说的,依此理由观之不实,依彼理由观之不真;这些事于我等身上不存在,且于我等身上也寻不到。我们的导师实是一切知者,法是善说,僧伽是善修行,对此有这样那样的理由。”在此处应知,第二句是第一句的同义词,第四句是第三句的同义词。这驳斥只应针对毁谤而行,并非在所有情况下都如此。因为若有人说“你戒行不好,你师戒行不好,你做了这些那些事,你师做了这些那些事”时,你若默然忍受,便会令人起疑。因此,应不起心嗔而驳斥那毁谤。然而,对于以“你是骆驼,你是牛”等十种辱骂事来骂人者,只应旁观并修习忍辱。显示巴利原文
Tattha tatra tumhehīti, tasmiṃ avaṇṇe tumhehi. Abhūtaṃ abhūtato nibbeṭhetabbanti yaṃ abhūtaṃ, taṃ abhūtabhāveneva apanetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Itipetaṃ abhūtantiādinā nayena. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ satthā na sabbaññū, dhammo durakkhāto, saṅgho duppaṭipanno’’tiādīni sutvā na tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pana vattabbaṃ – ‘‘iti petaṃ abhūtaṃ, yaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, taṃ imināpi kāraṇena abhūtaṃ, imināpi kāraṇena atacchaṃ, ‘natthi cetaṃ amhesu’, ‘na ca panetaṃ amhesu saṃvijjati’, sabbaññūyeva amhākaṃ satthā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho, tatra idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti. Ettha ca dutiyaṃ padaṃ paṭhamassa, catutthañca tatiyassa vevacananti veditabbaṃ. Idañca avaṇṇeyeva nibbeṭhanaṃ kātabbaṃ, na sabbattha. Yadi hi ‘‘tvaṃ dussīlo, tavācariyo dussīlo, idañcidañca tayā kataṃ, tavācariyena kata’’nti vutte tuṇhībhūto adhivāseti, āsaṅkanīyo hoti. Tasmā manopadosaṃ akatvā avaṇṇo nibbeṭhetabbo. ‘‘Oṭṭhosi, goṇosī’’tiādinā pana nayena dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosantaṃ puggalaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā adhivāsanakhantiyeva tattha kātabbā.
6 如此,在显示了毁谤情况下如来的特相之后,现在为了显明在赞誉情况下的情形,世尊说:“诸比丘,若他人称扬我……”等等。在这里,“他人”是指某些具足净信的天和人。“欢喜”:因为以此为喜,所以称为欢喜,这是“喜悦”的同义词。“善意”的状态就是“悦”,这是心所乐的同义词。“踊跃”的状态就是“踊跃的状态”。是谁的踊跃状态呢?是心的。这是会导致掉举、令心雀跃的喜悦的同义词。在此,同样以两个词说明行蕴,以一个词说明受蕴。显示巴利原文
6. Evaṃ avaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ tādilakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā idāni vaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādimāha. Tattha pareti ye keci pasannā devamanussā. Ānandanti etenāti ānando, pītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppilāvino bhāvo uppilāvitattaṃ. Kassa uppilāvitattanti? Cetasoti. Uddhaccāvahāya uppilāpanapītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idhāpi dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandho vutto.
如此,以第一种方式制止了心的踊跃之后,再以第二种方式显示其中的过患,于是说道:“如果你们在那里……”等等。在这里也应当知道:那种踊跃就是你们的障碍;意思是,由于那种踊跃,它就会成为你们获得初禅等的障碍。那么,世尊为何这样说?难道世尊不曾——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamanayena uppilāvitattaṃ nivāretvā, dutiyena tattha ādīnavaṃ dassento – ‘‘tatra ce tumhe assathā’’tiādimāha. Idhāpi tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyoti tena uppilāvitattena tumhākaṃyeva paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo bhaveyyāti attho veditabbo. Kasmā panetaṃ vuttaṃ? Nanu bhagavatā –
当称颂“佛陀”时,身中生起的那种喜悦;
那喜确实殊胜,胜过拥有整个赡部洲。
称扬“法”时,身中生起的那喜;
那喜确实殊胜,胜过拥有整个赡部洲。
称扬僧团时,身体内生起的那种喜悦;
那喜悦确实殊胜,胜过拥有整个赡部洲。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenāpi jambudīpassa. Dhammoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenāpi jambudīpassa. Saṅghoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenāpi jambudīpassā’’ti ca.
又如“比丘们,凡对佛陀具足净信者,便是对最殊胜者具足净信”等语,在数百部经典中,世尊都以这样的方式赞叹对三宝的欢喜与喜悦。这确实是赞叹,但那是依于出离的欢喜。而此处所指的,则是在具寿车匿心中,以“我们的佛陀、我们的法”这类方式生起的、依于世俗、属于家居的欢喜与喜悦。因为这种欢喜会成为证得禅那等的障碍。也正因为如此,具寿车匿在佛陀尚未般涅槃期间,未能证得殊胜的成就;而在佛陀般涅槃时,他受到所制定的梵罚的惩治,舍弃了那种欢喜与喜悦,才证得了殊胜。所以,应知此处是针对这种会成为障碍的欢喜而说。因为这种欢喜是与贪共存的喜,而贪则与嗔相似。正如所说——显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā’’ti ca evamādīhi anekasatehi suttehi ratanattaye pītisomanassameva vaṇṇitanti. Saccaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ, taṃ pana nekkhammanissitaṃ. Idha – ‘‘amhākaṃ buddho, amhākaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā nayena āyasmato channassa uppannasadisaṃ gehassitaṃ pītisomanassaṃ adhippetaṃ. Idañhi jhānādipaṭilābhāya antarāyakaraṃ hoti. Tenevāyasmā channopi yāva buddho na parinibbāyi, tāva visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi, parinibbānakāle paññattena pana brahmadaṇḍena tajjito taṃ pītisomanassaṃ pahāya visesaṃ nibbattesi. Tasmā antarāyakaraṃyeva sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayañhi lobhasahagatā pīti. Lobho ca kodhasadisova. Yathāha –
贪婪者不知义理,贪婪者不见法;
当贪欲攫住人之时,彼时便是一片盲目的黑暗。
贪乃无义之生起者,贪乃内心之扰动者;
从内心生起的恐惧,人们却不能觉知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ. Anatthajanano lobho, lobho cittappakopano; Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhatī’’ti. (itivu. 88);
而这第三种情况应知:未来虽未实际到来,从义理上则已到来。正如愤怒者不了知义理,贪婪者同样不了知义理。显示巴利原文
Tatiyavāro pana idha anāgatopi atthato āgato yevāti veditabbo. Yatheva hi kuddho, evaṃ luddhopi atthaṃ na jānātīti.
在说明应遵行方式的这一节中,其连接如下:听了“你们的导师是知一切的阿拉汉、正自觉者,法是善说的,僧团是善行的”等语之后,不应保持沉默。而应这样宣称:“诚如你们所说,此是真实;以此因缘亦是真实,以此因缘亦是确实。彼世尊,正是这样的阿拉汉,正是这样的正自觉者;法,确是如此善说、现前自见的;僧团,确是如此善行、正直而行的。”即使被问“你是持戒者吗?”,若确实持戒,也应当宣称“我是持戒者”。被问“你是初禅的获得者吗?……乃至……你是阿拉汉吗?”,也只应在同类比丘面前承认。如此,既避免了不善的欲望,也彰显了教法并非空无实效。其余部分,应如前面所说方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Paṭipajjitabbākāradassanavāre panāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ satthā sabbaññū arahaṃ sammāsambuddho, dhammo svākkhāto, saṅgho suppaṭipanno’’tiādīni sutvā na tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pana paṭijānitabbaṃ – ‘‘itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, yaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, taṃ imināpi kāraṇena bhūtaṃ, imināpi kāraṇena tacchaṃ. So hi bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho; dhammo itipi svākkhāto, itipi sandiṭṭhiko ; saṅgho itipi suppaṭipanno, itipi ujuppaṭipanno’’ti. ‘‘Tvaṃ sīlavā’’ti pucchitenāpi sace sīlavā, ‘‘sīlavāhamasmī’’ti paṭijānitabbameva. ‘‘Tvaṃ paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī…pe… arahā’’ti puṭṭhenāpi sabhāgānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃyeva paṭijānitabbaṃ. Evañhi pāpicchatā ceva parivajjitā hoti, sāsanassa ca amoghatā dīpitā hotīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
小戒注释显示巴利原文
Cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā
7 “然而,比丘们,这是微小的”一语,其关联为何?此经由两方面结合:赞叹与非难。其中,非难——所谓“此事并非真实,此事并非确实”——即于此如烈火抵水涯而熄灭,就此停歇。赞叹则当如实承认真实——“此事为真实”——如此,赞叹便延续而下。此赞叹又有两种:一为梵施所说的赞叹,二为比丘僧团以“贤友,真稀有!”等方式所发起的赞叹。在这两种赞叹中,比丘僧所说的赞叹,其后将在“说明空住处”中开示其关联。而在此处,为了显示梵施所说赞叹的关联,世尊便开示道:“然而,比丘们,这是微小的。”显示巴利原文
7.Appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhaveti ko anusandhi? Idaṃ suttaṃ dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ vaṇṇena ca avaṇṇena ca. Tattha avaṇṇo – ‘‘iti petaṃ abhūtaṃ iti petaṃ ataccha’’nti, ettheva udakantaṃ patvā aggiviya nivatto. Vaṇṇo pana bhūtaṃ bhūtato paṭijānitabbaṃ – ‘‘iti petaṃ bhūta’’nti evaṃ anuvattatiyeva. So pana duvidho brahmadattena bhāsitavaṇṇo ca bhikkhusaṅghena acchariyaṃ āvusotiādinā nayena āraddhavaṇṇo ca. Tesu bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇassa upari suññatāpakāsane anusandhiṃ dassessati. Idha pana brahmadattena vuttavaṇṇassa anusandhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti desanā āraddhā.
其中,“微少”(appamattaka)是微小的名称。“微些”(oramattaka)是它的同义词。“量”(mattā)称为尺度。某物之量微少,故称“微少”;某物之量更低微,故称“微些”。仅戒本身,即名“唯戒而已”。这便是说:“然而,比丘们,这是微少、微些、唯戒而已”,凡夫若鼓起勇气称“我赞叹如来功德”,他所称赞的功德,也仅限于此微不足道的程度。于此或有人疑:“此戒岂非修行者的无上庄严?”正如古德所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha appamattakanti parittassa nāmaṃ. Oramattakanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Mattāti vuccati pamāṇaṃ. Appaṃ mattā etassāti appamattakaṃ. Oraṃ mattā etassāti oramattakaṃ. Sīlameva sīlamattakaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘appamattakaṃ kho, panetaṃ bhikkhave, oramattakaṃ sīlamattakaṃ’ nāma yena ‘‘tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadāmī’’ti ussāhaṃ katvāpi vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno puthujjano vadeyyāti. Tattha siyā – nanu idaṃ sīlaṃ nāma yogino aggavibhūsanaṃ? Yathāhu porāṇā –
戒是瑜伽士的庄严,戒是瑜伽士的严饰;
以戒为庄严的瑜伽行者,于一切装饰中最为殊胜。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sīlaṃ yogissa’laṅkāro, sīlaṃ yogissa maṇḍanaṃ; Sīlehi’laṅkato yogī, maṇḍane aggataṃ gato’’ti.
世尊在数百部经中,也曾将戒作为极为重大的事情来宣说。如他所说:“比丘们,若有比丘这样期望:‘愿同梵行者喜爱我、悦意我、尊重我、崇敬我’,他便应当于诸戒中圆满行持。”(《中部》1.65)等等。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatāpi ca anekesu suttasatesu sīlaṃ mahantameva katvā kathitaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.65) ca.
犹如蓝松鸦护其卵,犹如犛牛护其尾;
犹如爱护爱子,犹如爱护独一的眼睛。
花香无法逆风飘送,
栴檀、多揭罗香与茉莉,其香也是如此。
唯有善人之香能逆风而行,
善士的德香向一切方向散播。
栴檀、多伽罗、青莲,还有茉莉;
在这些香品之中,戒香最为无上。
多伽罗与旃檀之香,此香微细;
然而,持戒者之香,于诸天中最为殊胜。
那些具足戒行、安住于不放逸的人,
那些依正智而解脱的人,魔罗找不到他们的踪迹。”(《法句经》第57颂)
一个有智慧的人,在戒上安住之后,修习心与慧;
精勤而又明察的比丘,他便能解开这个缠结。”(《相应部》1.23)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kikīva aṇḍaṃ, camarīva vāladhiṃ; Piyaṃva puttaṃ, nayanaṃva ekakaṃ. Tatheva sīlaṃ, anurakkhamānā; Supesalā hotha, sadā sagāravā’’ti ca. ‘‘Na pupphagandho paṭivātameti; Na candanaṃ taggaramallikā vā. Satañca gandho paṭivātameti; Sabbā disā sappuriso pavāyati. Candanaṃ tagaraṃ vāpi, uppalaṃ atha vassikī; Etesaṃ gandhajātānaṃ, sīlagandho anuttaro. Appamatto ayaṃ gandho, yvāyaṃ tagaracandanaṃ; Yo ca sīlavataṃ gandho, vāti devesu uttamo. Tesaṃ sampannasīlānaṃ, appamādavihārinaṃ; Sammadaññā vimuttānaṃ, māro maggaṃ na vindatī’’ti ca. (dha. pa. 57); ‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño, cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayaṃ; Ātāpī nipako bhikkhu, so imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭa’’nti ca. (saṃ. ni. 1.23);
“比丘们,譬如一切种子与草木,要生长、发育、壮大,无不依于大地,立于大地;如此,这些种子与草木才得以生长、发育、壮大。同样地,比丘们,比丘依于戒,立于戒,修习七觉支,数数修习七觉支,他便于法中获得增长、发育与壮大。”——正如《相应部》(5.150)中所说。同样,在许多其他经典中也可得见。像这样,在数百部经典中,戒都被宣说为重要的。那么,为何在此却将它说为“微小”呢?这是相较于更上位的功德而言。因为戒不能到达定,定不能到达慧,所以对应于上位的功德,下位的便被称为“低下的”。为何说戒不能到达定呢?世尊于成正觉后第七年,在舍卫城城门外的甘昙婆罗树下,坐于十二由旬宝帐中、一由旬大的宝石结跏趺座上,上方擎有三由旬的天白伞盖,于大众十二由旬的范围内,为策励自身、摧破外道,而示现双神变——“从上半身出火聚,从下半身出水流……乃至从每一毛孔出火聚,从每一毛孔出水流,显现六色……”等等。从他金色的身躯,金色的光芒放射出来,直抵有顶;那景象恰如整个一万世界都被庄严的时刻;显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ye keci bījagāmabhūtagāmā vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjanti, sabbe te pathaviṃ nissāya, pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya; evamete bījagāmabhūtagāmā vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjanti. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāya sattabojjhaṅge bhāvento sattabojjhaṅge bahulīkaronto vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ pāpuṇāti dhammesū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.150) ca. Evaṃ aññānipi anekāni suttāni daṭṭhabbāni. Evamanekesu suttasatesu sīlaṃ mahantameva katvā kathitaṃ. Taṃ ‘‘kasmā imasmiṃ ṭhāne appamattaka’’nti āhāti? Upari guṇe upanidhāya. Sīlañhi samādhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, samādhi paññaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tasmā uparimaṃ upanidhāya heṭṭhimaṃ oramattakaṃ nāma hoti. Kathaṃ sīlaṃ samādhiṃ na pāpuṇāti? Bhagavā hi abhisambodhito sattame saṃvacchare sāvatthinagara – dvāre kaṇḍambarukkhamūle dvādasayojane ratanamaṇḍape yojanappamāṇe ratanapallaṅke nisīditvā tiyojanike dibbasetacchatte dhāriyamāne dvādasayojanāya parisāya attādānaparidīpanaṃ titthiyamaddanaṃ – ‘‘uparimakāyato aggikkhandho pavattati, heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā pavattati…pe… ekekalomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, ekekalomakūpato udakadhārā pavattati, channaṃ vaṇṇāna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dasseti. Tassa suvaṇṇavaṇṇasarīrato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo uggantvā yāva bhavaggā gacchanti, sakaladasasahassacakkavāḷassa alaṅkaraṇakālo viya hoti, dutiyā dutiyā rasmiyo purimāya purimāya yamakayamakā viya ekakkhaṇe viya pavattanti.
然而,两个心识不可能在同一刹那中生起。但是,对于诸佛世尊,由于他们的有分心转起极为轻快,且通过五种方式反复纯熟,那些光芒看起来仿佛在同一刹那宛然俱现。但实际上,对于每一道光芒,转向、遍作、决意等心行,都是各各不同的。显示巴利原文
Dvinnañca cittānaṃ ekakkhaṇe pavatti nāma natthi. Buddhānaṃ pana bhagavantānaṃ bhavaṅgaparivāsassa lahukatāya pañcahākārehi āciṇṇavasitāya ca, tā ekakkhaṇe viya pavattanti. Tassā tassā pana rasmiyā āvajjanaparikammādhiṭṭhānāni visuṃ visuṃyeva.
为显现蓝光,世尊入青遍定;为黄光,入黄遍定;为红、白光,入红遍与白遍定;为出火聚,入火遍定;为出水流,入水遍定。导师自身经行时,其所化现者或立、或坐、或卧——此一切皆应详说。在这当中,全无戒的作用,纯是定的功用。像这样,戒不能到达定。显示巴利原文
Nīlarasmiatthāya hi bhagavā nīlakasiṇaṃ samāpajjati, pītarasmiatthāya pītakasiṇaṃ, lohitaodātarasmiatthāya lohitaodātakasiṇaṃ, aggikkhandhatthāya tejokasiṇaṃ, udakadhāratthāya āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjati. Satthā caṅkamati, nimmito tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappetīti sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Ettha ekampi sīlassa kiccaṃ natthi, sabbaṃ samādhikiccameva. Evaṃ sīlaṃ samādhiṃ na pāpuṇāti.
然而,世尊于百千劫又四不可计数的时间里,圆满了一切波罗蜜。二十九岁时,他从转轮王般荣华的宫殿出离,在阿诺玛河边出家,六年间精进瑜伽。毗舍佉月圆之日,他在乌汝韦喇村受用了苏迦陀供养、掺入天味酥的蜜粥。傍晚,他从南向北入菩提场,右绕乌敦跋罗树王三匝,站于东北方,铺好草座,结成三触结跏趺座。他以具足四支的慈心业处为先导,立下精进决意,坐于十四肘高的殊胜结跏趺座上,背靠五十肘高的菩提树干,犹如安于金台上的白银柱;头顶上方,菩提枝叶如宝伞般遮护。他身披金色袈裟,周遭珊瑚色的菩提新芽纷然飘落。日没时分,他摧破魔军;初夜,忆念宿住;中夜,净化天眼;后夜,随顺诸佛惯行的缘起相,导入智慧,生起安那般那第四禅那。以此为基础,增长毗婆舍那,依道次第证得第四道,断尽一切烦恼,通达一切佛陀功德。这正是他慧的作用。如是,定不能及于慧。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana bhagavā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā, ekūnatiṃsavassakāle cakkavattisirīnivāsabhūtā bhavanā nikkhamma anomānadītīre pabbajitvā, chabbassāni padhānayogaṃ katvā, visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ uruvelagāme sujātāya dinnaṃ pakkhittadibbojaṃ madhupāyāsaṃ paribhuñjitvā, sāyanhasamaye dakkhiṇuttarena bodhimaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā assatthadumarājānaṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā, pubbuttarabhāge ṭhito tiṇasanthāraṃ santharitvā, tisandhipallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā, vīriyādhiṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhāya, cuddasahatthapallaṅkavaragato suvaṇṇapīṭhe ṭhapitaṃ rajatakkhandhaṃ viya paññāsahatthaṃ bodhikkhandhaṃ piṭṭhito katvā, upari maṇichattena viya bodhisākhāya dhāriyamāno, suvaṇṇavaṇṇe cīvare pavāḷasadisesu bodhiaṅkuresu patamānesu, sūriye atthaṃ upagacchante mārabalaṃ vidhamitvā, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā, paccūsakāle sabbabuddhānamāciṇṇe paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā, ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā, tadeva pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā, maggapaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena catutthamaggena sabbakilese khepetvā sabbabuddhaguṇe paṭivijjhi, idamassa paññākiccaṃ. Evaṃ samādhi paññaṃ na pāpuṇāti.
这里,就像手中的水不及碗里的水,碗里的水不及罐里的水,罐里的水不及水瓶里的水,水瓶里的水不及大缸里的水,大缸里的水不及池塘里的水,池塘里的水不及山涧里的水,山涧里的水不及小溪里的水,小溪里的水不及五大河里的水,五大河里的水不及轮围海里的水,轮围海里的水不及须弥山脚下大海里的水。相对于碗里的水,手中的水便是‘微小’的;……乃至……相对于须弥山脚下大海里的水,轮围海里的水也是‘微小’的。如此,越往上层的水量越大,相较之下,越往下层的水便越显得‘微小’。显示巴利原文
Tattha yathā hatthe udakaṃ pātiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, pātiyaṃ udakaṃ ghaṭe udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, ghaṭe udakaṃ kolambe udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kolambe udakaṃ cāṭiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, cāṭiyaṃ udakaṃ mahākumbhiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, mahākumbhiyaṃ udakaṃ kusobbhe udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kusobbhe udakaṃ kandare udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kandare udakaṃ kunnadiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kunnadiyaṃ udakaṃ pañcamahānadiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, pañcamahānadiyaṃ udakaṃ cakkavāḷamahāsamudde udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, cakkavāḷamahāsamudde udakaṃ sinerupādake mahāsamudde udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Pātiyaṃ udakaṃ upanidhāya hatthe udakaṃ parittaṃ…pe… sinerupādakamahāsamudde udakaṃ upanidhāya cakkavāḷamahāsamudde udakaṃ parittaṃ. Iti uparūpari udakaṃ bahukaṃ upādāya heṭṭhā heṭṭhā udakaṃ parittaṃ hoti.
同样地,应当了知:以上一层功德来衡量,下一层较低的戒便成为‘微小’的、微不足道的。因此世尊说:‘比丘们,这确实只是“微小”的、微不足道的戒而已。’显示巴利原文
Evameva upari upari guṇe upādāya heṭṭhā heṭṭhā sīlaṃ appamattakaṃ oramattakanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, oramattakaṃ sīlamattaka’’nti.
“凡夫”一词,在此处——显示巴利原文
Yenaputhujjanoti, ettha –
佛陀——那位太阳的族亲(Adiccabandhu)——曾说过有两种凡夫:
一种是盲目的凡夫,另一种是善的凡夫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti.
其中,于蕴、界、处等法,不曾学习、遍问、听闻、持守与审察者,是为“盲凡夫”。具足这些学习者,则是“善凡夫”。然而,这两类凡夫——显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇapaccavekkhaṇāni natthi, ayaṃ andhaputhujjano. Yassa tāni atthi, so kalyāṇaputhujjano. Duvidhopi panesa –
由“产生”(janana)等众多因缘,故称凡夫;
或因他们含摄于凡夫之类,或以此“广众”之义,故称凡夫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti’’.
他正是由于产生种种烦恼等众多缘故,故称凡夫。正如所说:显示巴利原文
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha –
因为他们产生众多烦恼,故是凡夫;因为他们有众多未破除的有身见,故是凡夫;因为他们是仰视众多导师面容之人,故是凡夫;因为他们未从一切趣中脱离,故是凡夫;因为他们造作种种不同的行,故是凡夫;他们被种种暴流冲走,被种种热恼所烧,被种种炽热所灼,故是凡夫;他们对五种欲功德染着、贪着、系缚、昏醉、陷入、执取、障碍,故是凡夫;他们被五盖覆盖、遮蔽、笼罩、封闭、掩盖、覆藏,故是凡夫。又因他被包含在那不可计数的、背离圣法、践行卑劣法的众多人中,故是凡夫;或因他作为众多之人,分别不与具足戒、闻等功德的圣者们共计、不混杂,故是凡夫(众多之人)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā, puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhanti, puthu santāpehi santappanti, puthu pariḷāhehi pariḍayhanti, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gathitā mucchitā ajjhopannā laggā laggitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvutā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanā’’ti. Puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjano, puthuvāyaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhyaṃ gato visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janehīti puthujjanoti.
“如来”:世尊因八种理由而称为如来。即:如此而来,故称如来;如此而去,故称如来;到达真实相,故称如来;如实地觉悟真实法,故称如来;有如实见,故称如来;有如实说,故称如来;有如实行,故称如来;以最胜伏之义,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatassāti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato. Tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathavāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti.
何以说世尊是“如实而来”故称如来?如同过去诸正自觉者,为利乐一切世间而精勤驰驱,如毗婆尸世尊之来,尸弃世尊、毗舍婆世尊、拘留孙世尊、拘那含佛世尊、迦叶世尊之来。这是什么意思呢?即:他们是以怎样的愿力而来,我们的世尊也以同样的愿力而来。又或者,如同毗婆尸世尊……乃至……迦叶世尊,圆满布施巴拉密、戒波罗蜜、出离巴拉密、智慧巴拉密、精进巴拉密、忍耐巴拉密、真实巴拉密、决意波罗蜜、慈爱巴拉密、舍巴拉密——圆满此十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最胜波罗蜜,合为三十波罗蜜;行五种大舍——舍弃肢体、眼目、财富、王国、儿女与妻子;圆满往昔的修行、往昔的梵行、说法、知义行与利益亲族行等,达至佛行之巅而来;同样地,我们的世尊也是如此而来。又或者,如同毗婆尸世尊……乃至……迦叶世尊,修习并增广四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、圣八支道而来;同样地,我们的世尊也是如此而来。正因如此“如实而来”,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā, yathā vipassī bhagavā āgato, yathā sikhī bhagavā, yathā vessabhū bhagavā, yathā kakusandho bhagavā, yathā koṇāgamano bhagavā, yathā kassapo bhagavā āgato . Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yena abhinīhārena ete bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā, sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramiṃ pūretvā, imā dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā aṅgapariccāgaṃ, nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgato; tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… kassapo bhagavā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne, cattāro sammappadhāne, cattāro iddhipāde, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅge, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā āgato, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
如同毗婆尸等诸牟尼,
已证一切知智,来至此世;
同样,这位释迦牟尼也是如实而来。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yatheva lokamhi vipassiādayo, Sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, Tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumā’’ti.
如此,以“如实而来”,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
如何是以‘如实而去’而称为如来?就如刚诞生的毗婆尸世尊那样去……乃至迦叶世尊那样去。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato? Yathā sampatijāto vipassī bhagavā gato…pe… kassapo bhagavā gato.
那么,世尊是怎样去的呢?他刚一出生,便以双足平稳踏地,面朝北方,迈出七步。正如经中所说:‘阿难,菩萨刚出生,即以双足平稳站立,面朝北方,迈出七步,头顶有白伞盖擎举,环顾十方,发出狮子吼:“我是世间最上者,我是世间最长者,我是世间最胜者,这是我的最后一生,不再有后有。”’显示巴利原文
Kathañca so bhagavā gato ? So hi sampati jātova samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gato. Yathāha – ‘‘sampatijāto kho, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsati – ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthidāni punabbhavo’ti’’ (dī. ni. 2.31).
他此行是真实的吗?并不虚妄,它成为众多殊胜成就的前兆。因为他刚出生,便以双足平稳站立,这就是他将来获得四神足的前兆。显示巴利原文
Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi? Avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijātova samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahi. Idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ.
而“面朝北方”,则是一切出世间状态的前兆。显示巴利原文
Uttarābhimukhabhāvo pana sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ.
行走七步,是将来证得七觉支这一法宝的前兆。显示巴利原文
Sattapadavītihāro, sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa.
经文中“金柄拂尘飘拂”这一句所描述的拂尘飘扬,是将来摧破一切外道的前兆。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti, ettha vuttacāmarukkhepo pana sabbatitthiyanimmaddanassa.
“撑着白伞”,是将来证得阿拉汉果、获得无上清净白伞之解脱的前兆。显示巴利原文
Setacchattadhāraṇaṃ, arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa.
“站在第七步,环顾十方”,是将来证得一切知无碍智的前兆。显示巴利原文
Sattamapadūpari ṭhatvā sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ, sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa.
“作狮子吼”,是将来转动那不可逆转的殊胜法轮的前兆。显示巴利原文
Āsabhivācābhāsanaṃ appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ.
同样地,这位世尊也是如此行去;他那一种行迹,正是作为证得那些殊胜成就的前兆,如实、无谬。显示巴利原文
Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato, tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi, avitathaṃ, tesaṃyeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena.
因此,古德们如是说:显示巴利原文
Tenāhu porāṇā –
犹如牛王方出生片刻,角便渐次增长,
以平稳的双足触踏大地;
乔达摩迈出七步,
诸天擎持白色伞盖。
乔达摩行七步已,
周遍而视十方;
彼时宣说具足八支之音声:
犹如雄狮立于山顶。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Muhuttajātova gavampatī yathā, Samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, Setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, Disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayi, Sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti.
如此,依如实而去,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
再者,如同毗婆尸世尊……乃至迦叶世尊,这位世尊也完全一样:以出离断除欲贪,以无嗔断除嗔恚,以光明想断除昏沉睡眠,以无散乱断除掉举恶作,以法的决断断除疑,以智慧破除无明,以喜悦消除不喜,以初禅打开诸盖之门闩,以第二禅平息寻伺,以第三禅远离喜,以第四禅断除乐苦,以入空无边处定超越色想、有对想与种种想,以入识无边处定超越空无边处想,以入无所有处定超越识无边处想,以入非想非非想处定超越无所有处想,如此而去。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ pahāya gato , abyāpādena byāpādaṃ, ālokasaññāya thinamiddhaṃ, avikkhepena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ, dhammavavatthānena vicikicchaṃ pahāya ñāṇena avijjaṃ padāletvā, pāmojjena aratiṃ vinodetvā, paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā, dutiyajjhānena vitakkavicāraṃ vūpasametvā, tatiyajjhānena pītiṃ virājetvā, catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāya, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānānattasaññāyo samatikkamitvā, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ samatikkamitvā gato.
由无常随观而断除常想,由苦随观而断除乐想,由无我随观而断除我想,由厌离随观而断除欢喜爱著,由离贪随观而断除贪欲,由灭随观而断除集起,由舍离随观而断除执取,由灭尽随观而断除密集想,由衰坏随观而断除积聚,由变易随观而断除恒常想,由无相随观而断除相,由无愿随观而断除愿求,由空随观而断除执著,由增上慧法观而断除执取实体之执,由如实智见而断除痴迷执著,由过患随观而断除依恋执著,由审察随观而断除不审察,由转向随观而断除结缚执著;以入流道破与邪见相应之烦恼,以斯陀含道断粗重烦恼,以阿那含道根除微细随眠,以阿拉汉道遍断一切烦恼而永尽。如是,亦可说彼如实而至,故名如来。显示巴利原文
Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pahāya, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññaṃ, anattānupassanāya attasaññaṃ, nibbidānupassanāya nandiṃ, virāgānupassanāya rāgaṃ, nirodhānupassanāya samudayaṃ, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānaṃ, khayānupassanāya ghanasaññaṃ, vayānupassanāya āyūhanaṃ, vipariṇāmānupassanāya dhuvasaññaṃ, animittānupassanāya nimittaṃ, appaṇihitānupassanāya paṇidhiṃ, suññatānupassanāya abhinivesaṃ, adhipaññādhammavipassanāya sārādānābhinivesaṃ, yathābhūtañāṇadassanena sammohābhinivesaṃ, ādīnavānupassanāya ālayābhinivesaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya appaṭisaṅkhaṃ, vivaṭṭānupassanāya saṃyogābhinivesaṃ, sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhekaṭṭhe kilese bhañjitvā, sakadāgāmimaggena oḷārike kilese pahāya, anāgāmimaggena aṇusahagate kilese samugghāṭetvā, arahattamaggena sabbakilese samucchinditvā gato. Evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
何以说‘如来’如实契入真实之相?地界坚硬的特性,是真实不虚的;水界流动的特性;火界暖热的特性;风界支持的特性;空界无触对的特性;识界了知的特性。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato?Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ. Vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
色的变坏特性;受的感受特性;想的认知特性;行的造作特性;识的了知特性。显示巴利原文
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
「寻」的特相是安置于所缘;「伺」的特相是审察;「喜」的特相是充满;「乐」的特相是适意;「心一境性」的特相是不散乱;「触」的特相是接触。显示巴利原文
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
「信根」的特相是胜解;「精进根」的特相是策励;「念根」的特相是近住;「定根」的特相是不散乱;「慧根」的特相是了知。显示巴利原文
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyindriyassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
「信力」的特相是不为无信所动摇;「精进力」的特相是不为懈怠所动摇;「念力」的特相是不为失念所动摇;「定力」的特相是不为掉举所动摇;「慧力」的特相是不为无明所动摇。显示巴利原文
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyabalassa kosajje, satibalassa muṭṭhassacce. Samādhibalassa uddhacce, paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支的相是近住,择法觉支的相是简择,精进觉支的相是策励,喜觉支的相是遍满,轻安觉支的相是寂止,定觉支的相是不散乱,舍觉支的相是省察。显示巴利原文
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa vūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的相是见,正思惟的相是安立所缘,正语的相是摄受,正业的相是等起,正命的相是清净,正精进的相是策励,正念的相是近住,正定的相是不散乱。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvācāya pariggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvāyāmassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的相是无知,行的相是思,识的相是了知,名的相是倾向,色的相是变坏,六处的相是处,触的相是触,受的相是感受,爱的相是因,取的相是执取,有的相是积聚,生的相是出生,老的相是衰败,死的相是死殁。显示巴利原文
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ. Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ. Upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ. Jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
界以空为相,处以处为相,念处以近住为相,正勤以精勤为相,神足以成就为相,根以增上为相,力以不可动摇为相,觉支以出离为相,道以因为相。显示巴利原文
Dhātūnaṃ suññatālakkhaṇaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ. Iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ. Balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ. Maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
谛以真实为相,止以不散乱为相,观以随观为相,止观以一味为相,双运以不超越为相。显示巴利原文
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ. Samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ. Samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Yuganaddhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净以防护为相,心清净以不散乱为相,见清净以见为相。显示巴利原文
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaralakkhaṇaṃ. Cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ.
「灭尽智」的特相是断,「无生智」的特相是轻安。显示巴利原文
Khaye ñāṇassa samucchedanalakkhaṇaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ.
「欲」以根为相,「作意」以令现起为相,「触」以和合为相,「受」以集会为相,「定」以上首为相,「念」以增上为相,「慧」以超越为相,「解脱」以核心为相……「深入不死」的「涅槃」以究竟为相,这是真实不虚的。如此,以智到达真实之相,无有偏离地证得、达到,故称如来。如此,因具足真实之相,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ. Manasikārassa samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññāya tatuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ… amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
如何由如实通达真实法而称「如来」?所谓真实法,即是四圣谛。如经中所说:‘诸比丘,有四种真实,不虚妄,不变异。哪四种?诸比丘,“这是苦”是真实,不虚妄,不变异……’(广说)。世尊已彻底通达这些真实法,因此,由通达真实法,故称「如来」。此处,‘gata’即‘通达’之义。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idaṃ dukkha’nti bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmā tathānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambuddhattho hettha gatasaddo.
再者,“老死”以生为缘而生起、集起的道理是真实的、不虚妄、不变异的……“行”以无明为缘而生起、集起的道理是真实的……同样地,无明为行之缘、行为识之缘……乃至生为老死之缘,这些道理都是真实的、不虚妄、不变异的。世尊已彻底通达这一切义理,因通达这些真实法,故称为如来。这便是由如实通达真实法而名为如来。显示巴利原文
Api ca jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe…, saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe…, tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho, saṅkhārānaṃ viññāṇassa paccayaṭṭho…pe…, jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmāpi tathānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如何由“如实见”而称为如来?世尊对于含天神的世间……乃至天、人众生,在无量世界、无量众生的眼门所现起的色所缘,能以一切方式了知、照见。当他如此知见时,对于那个色——无论依可爱、不可爱等方式,还是依所见、所闻、所觉、所识中可得的义理——以这样的方式分析:“什么是那个色处?即依四大种所造、显现有对碍的色,如青、黄等。”以种种名称、十三种分类、五十二种方法一一分析,这一切全是真实的,无有虚妄。同样的道理也适用于耳门等现起的声等所缘。世尊曾这样说:“比丘们,凡是含天神的世间……乃至天、人众生所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所证、所求、心中伺察的,我皆了知;我已完全了知,对如来而言这是已知的,而如来于彼不执取。”如此,便由“如实见”而称为如来。于此,在“如实见”的意义上,应知“如来”一词的成立。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe…, sadevamanussāya pajāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthamāgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārato jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca, tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā. ‘‘Katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 616) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvepaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthaṃ āgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘yaṃ bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi. Tamahaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassī atthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如何由“如实语”而称为如来?从世尊于菩提座上那无可匹敌之座,降伏三魔,证得无上正自觉的那一夜,至双沙罗树间入无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜,在这两夜之间的四十五年里,由世尊以最初正觉智、中期正觉智和最后正觉智所说的一切教法——修多罗、祇夜……乃至吠陀罗——在义理与文句上都无可指摘,无减无增,一切方面圆满无缺,能摧伏贪、瞋、痴的骄慢。这当中连毫毛尖端那么小的错谬都不存在,一切就像用同一枚印章印出,用同一个量器量出,用同一杆秤称出那样,完全是真实的,不虚妄,不变异。因此经典中说:“准达,从如来证得无上正自觉之夜,至入无余涅槃之夜,于此中间所说的、所谈论的、所开示的一切,都是真实的,没有别异。故称如来。”在此,“gata”一词意即“说”。如此,由“如实语”而名为如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ – suttaṃ, geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ, anūnamanadhikaṃ, sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ, rāgamadanimmadanaṃ, dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ. Natthi tattha vālaggamattampi avakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca, tathameva hoti avitathaṃ anaññathaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti, no aññathā. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Gadattho hettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato.
此外,āgadana 意为言说,āgada 亦即言语。因为如来具有三种不颠倒的言语,所以将 da 音转为 ta 音,便形成 tathāgata(如来)。在此意义下,应当如此了知该词的语法成立。显示巴利原文
Api ca āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tayo aviparīto āgado assāti, da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如何由‘如实行’而称为如来?世尊的身行随顺于语,语行亦随顺于身,因此他怎么说,便如何行;如何行,便如何说。他如此如实而行,那与语相应的身行即如语而行去、而转起,故称如来。同样,与身相应的语行亦如身而行去、而转起,故称如来。正是因此,经中说:‘比丘们,如来是如语者、如行者,也是如行者、如语者。正因如来是如语者、如行者,如行者、如语者,所以称为如来。’这便是由‘如实行’而称为如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassapi vācā, tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathāvācā, kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī . Iti yathāvādī tathākārī yathākārī tathāvādī. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如何由‘征服’义而称为如来?上至有顶天,下至无间地狱,以此为界,横向遍及不可计量的世界界,如来以戒、以定、以慧、以解脱、以解脱智见,降伏一切众生,没有任何人能与他相等或加以衡量。他是无与伦比者、不可称量者、无上者,是王中之王,天中之天,胜越诸帝释,胜越诸梵天。因此经中说:‘比丘们,在以天、魔、梵为界的世间……乃至在含天界与人界的众生中,如来是征服者,不为他胜,是一切处的见者,是自在主,因而称为如来。’显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlenapi samādhināpi paññāyapi vimuttiyāpi, vimuttiñāṇadassanenapi na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi; atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājātirājā devadevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti.
于此,应如是了知词源的成就:‘阿伽陀(agada)’犹如‘无病(agada)’。此为何义?即说法之庄严与功德之积聚。正如那具大神力的医者以天药降伏诸毒蛇一般,他以说法之庄严与功德之积聚,胜伏一切外道及包括天神在内的世间。如此,在胜伏一切世间上,他如实不颠倒,具足说法之庄严与功德之积聚,故称 agada。再将 da 转为 ta,即成 tathāgata。由此从‘胜伏’义而称为如来。显示巴利原文
Tatrevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā. Agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbālokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca agado assāti. Da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
再者,依真如而行,亦名如来;如实而行,亦名如来。这里的‘行’(gato),含义是已通达、已超越、已证得、已行道。显示巴利原文
Api ca tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgato. Gatoti avagato, atīto patto paṭipannoti attho.
其中,对一切世间以遍知如实通达,故为如来;对世间集以断如实超越,故为如来;对世间灭以作证如实证得,故为如来;对导向世间灭之道如实行道,故为如来。因此,世尊曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Tattha sakalalokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato. Lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们!世间已被如来所正觉,如来已离脱世间。比丘们!世间集已被如来所正觉,于如来,世间集已断除。比丘们!世间灭已被如来所正觉,于如来,世间灭已现证。比丘们!导向世间灭之道已被如来所正觉,于如来,导向世间灭之道已修习。比丘们!乃至含天神的世间……凡此一切,皆为如来所正觉。因此,称为‘如来’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ. Tasmā, tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
同样地,此义亦应如此理解。然而,这些仅是阐明如来之所以为如来的初步入口罢了。若要遍一切方面赞叹如来之所以为如来,唯有如来本身方能为之。显示巴利原文
Tassapi evaṃ attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpane mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya.
“比丘们!那是哪一种呢?”——此问意为:凡夫以那微细、低浅、仅属戒律的方面来称赞如来时,所可能说的,究竟是哪一种?于此,提问共有五种:未显明而问、见后核对问、断疑而问、征得同意问、欲说而问。显示巴利原文
Katamañca taṃ bhikkhaveti yena appamattakena oramattakena sīlamattakena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyya, taṃ katamanti pucchati? Tattha pucchā nāma adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā, vimaticchedanā pucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatā pucchāti pañcavidhā hoti.
什么是未见阐明问?对于自性上尚未了知的相——未见、未衡量、未审查、未明了、未显明,为了知解、看见、衡量、审查、显明而发问,这便是未见阐明问。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamā adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti, adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhāvanāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā.
什么是见已核对问?对于自性上已了知的相——已见、已衡量、已审查、已明了、已显明,为了与其他智者核对而发问,这便是见已核对问。显示巴利原文
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti, diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, tassa aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā.
什么是断疑问?原本便陷入疑惑、陷于犹豫、心生两端,想:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?到底是什么?究竟如何?”为了断除这些疑惑而发问,这便是断疑问。显示巴利原文
Katamā vimaticchedanā pucchā? Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti, vimatipakkhando, dveḷhakajāto, ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kinnu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti. So vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ vimaticchedanā pucchā.
什么是征询同意问?世尊为征询比丘们的同意而发问,例如:“比丘们!你们认为如何?色是常还是无常?”“尊者!无常。”“无常者是苦还是乐?”“尊者!是苦。”(《大品》21)凡此类提问都应如此理解,这便是征询同意问。显示巴利原文
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti. Aniccaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ , dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vāti? Dukkhaṃ bhanteti (mahāva. 21) sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ, ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么是想说而问?世尊因欲为比丘们说法而提问。例如:“比丘们!有四念处。哪四种?”……“比丘们!有八支道。哪八支?”这便是想说而问。显示巴利原文
Katamā kathetukamyatā pucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Cattārome, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro?…Pe… aṭṭhime bhikkhave maggaṅgā. Katame aṭṭhāti, ayaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchā.
因此,在这五种问当中,由于如来对任何法都不存在“未见”的情况,所以没有“未见阐明问”;如来也绝不会生起这样的念头:“我应当和其他有智慧的沙门、婆罗门共同商讨后再宣讲此法”,故亦无“见已核对问”;又因佛陀于一切法皆无渴爱与踌躇,所有疑惑皆在菩提树下彻底断除,所以也没有“断疑问”。其余两种问,佛陀是有的,此处所要说的便是“想说而问”。显示巴利原文
Iti imāsu pañcasu pucchāsu adiṭṭhassa tāva kassaci dhammassa abhāvato tathāgatassa adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā natthi. ‘‘Idaṃ nāma aññehi paṇḍitehi samaṇabrāhmaṇehi saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā desessāmī’’ti samannāhārasseva anuppajjanato diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāpi natthi. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ekadhammepi āsappanā parisappanā natthi, bodhimaṇḍeyeva sabbā kaṅkhā chinnā; tasmā vimaticchedanā pucchāpi natthiyeva. Avasesā pana dve pucchā buddhānaṃ atthi, tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchā nāma.
8 现在,为了阐明“为说而问”所问之义,他便说:“断除杀生”等语。显示巴利原文
8. Idāni taṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchāya pucchitamatthaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādimāha.
在此,“对生命的杀害”即“杀生”,也就是杀害生命、杀死生命的意思。此中的“生命”,就世俗共许而言指有情众生,就胜义而言指命根。当某人对该生命有“生命想”时,依身门或语门而生起的、以断除命根的加行为因而发起的杀思,即是杀生。对于没有功德的生命,如畜生等,生命体小则罪轻,身体大则罪重。何以故?因为所付出的加行大。纵然加行程度相同,也因对象身体巨大而罪重。对于有功德的生命,如人等,功德小者罪轻,功德大者罪重。而当身体大小与功德相当时,烦恼轻微、加行柔和则罪轻,烦恼猛烈、加行粗暴则罪重,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho, pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ, tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo, kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo.
杀生具足五条支分:有生命、有生命想、有杀心、有加行、由此而死。有六种手段:亲手、教令、投掷、暗阱、咒术、神通。若对此义详细展开,则极为繁冗,故不在此详述,其他类似处亦同。有需要者可查阅《普端严律注》以知详细。显示巴利原文
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti . Cha payogā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti. Imasmiṃ panatthe vitthāriyamāne ativiya papañco hoti, tasmā taṃ na vitthārayāma, aññañca evarūpaṃ. Atthikehi pana samantapāsādikaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ oloketvā gahetabbaṃ.
“断除”(pahāya)即是断除了这称为‘杀生思’的恶戒。“已远离”(paṭivirato)是指从断除的那一刻起,便已远离该恶戒,不再与之相关。他既无‘我将违犯’之心,那些眼、耳所能识知的法尚且不犯,更遑论身体行为。在其他类似文句中的义理,也应以同样的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Pahāyāti imaṃ pāṇātipātacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭiviratoti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya tato dussīlyato orato viratova. Natthi tassa vītikkamissāmīti cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā pageva kāyikāti imināva nayena aññesupi evarūpesu padesu attho veditabbo.
“沙门”(samaṇo)是世尊因止息罪恶而获得的称号。“乔达摩”(Gotamo)是按姓氏来称呼的。不仅世尊远离了杀生,比丘僧团也同样远离杀生。虽然教法从最初即是这样传来,但解释义理时,也可依比丘僧团来加以阐明。显示巴利原文
Samaṇoti bhagavā samitapāpatāya laddhavohāro. Gotamoti gottavasena. Na kevalañca bhagavāyeva pāṇātipātā paṭivirato, bhikkhusaṅghopi paṭivirato, desanā pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ āgatā, atthaṃ pana dīpentena bhikkhusaṅghavasenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
“放下棍棒、放下刀杖”(nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho)意思是:由于不会为了伤害他人而拿起棍棒或刀杖,因此棍棒已放下,刀杖也已放下。在此,除棍棒外,其余一切会损害众生的器具,都应理解为“刀杖”。然而,比丘们手持裁截棍、齿木、剃刀或胡椒磨等行走时,并非为了伤害他人,故他们仍被视为“放下棍棒、放下刀杖”。显示巴利原文
Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasatthoti parūpaghātatthāya daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā ādāya avattanato nikkhittadaṇḍo ceva nikkhittasattho cāti attho. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇaṃ sattānaṃ viheṭhanabhāvato satthanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā vāsiṃ pipphalikaṃ vā gahetvā vicaranti, na taṃ parūpaghātatthāya. Tasmā nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
“有惭者”:具足以厌离恶行为相的惭。“具悲悯者”:已进入悲悯、慈心的状态。“怜悯一切有息生类的利益”:即以利益怜悯一切有息生类;因那种具悲悯的状态,他对一切有息生类心怀利益。“住”:即行、活命、维持、保护。或者,诸比丘,也可以这样说。其中的“vā”字,是参照后面“断除不与取”等文句,表示选择的意义。如此,在所有地方,都应参照前文或后文,理解为具有选择关系。显示巴利原文
Lajjīti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgato. Dayāpannoti dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno. Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti; sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako. Tāya dayāpannatāya sabbesaṃ pāṇabhūtānaṃ hitacittakoti attho. Viharatīti iriyati yapeti yāpeti pāleti . Iti vā hi, bhikkhaveti evaṃ vā bhikkhave. Vā saddo upari ‘‘adinnādānaṃ pahāyā’’tiādīni apekkhitvā vikappattho vutto, evaṃ sabbattha purimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā apekkhitvā vikappabhāvo veditabbo.
在此,有一概要说明:诸比丘,凡夫称赞如来时,会这样说:“沙门乔达摩不杀生,不令杀,也不赞同杀生,他远离了这种恶戒。啊,佛陀的功德真是广大!”他虽怀着极大的热忱想要称赞,所能道出的,却只是一些微小、有限、仅止于行仪戒的内容。他无法依那不共功德来称赞。不仅如此,凡夫、入流者、一来者、不来者、阿拉汉,乃至独觉佛,同样都做不到;唯有如来能够,我随后将为你们解说。这就是此处的义理解释及其要旨。从此以后,我们将只解释前所未释的文句。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo pāṇaṃ na hanati, na ghāteti, na tattha samanuñño hoti, virato imasmā dussīlyā; aho, vata re buddhaguṇā mahantā’’ti, iti mahantaṃ ussāhaṃ katvā vaṇṇaṃ vattukāmopi appamattakaṃ oramattakaṃ ācārasīlamattakameva vakkhati. Upari asādhāraṇabhāvaṃ nissāya vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ na sakkhissati. Na kevalañca puthujjanova sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmiarahantopi paccekabuddhāpi na sakkontiyeva; tathāgatoyeva pana sakkoti, taṃ vo upari vakkhāmīti, ayamettha sādhippāyā atthavaṇṇanā. Ito paraṃ pana apubbapadameva vaṇṇayissāma.
“断除不与取”中,“不与取”即取未给予之物,亦即占用他物、偷盗、盗窃。在此,“未给予”是指属于他人所有之物,他人可随心所欲使用,若有人侵犯,便会受惩罚而无免于谴责。对这些他人所有之物,作“此是他人所有”想,并生起以偷盗为手段的意念,这种偷盗的思,即名为“不与取”。若所对是低劣的他人财物,罪过则小;若所对是殊胜财物,罪过则大。何以故?因物殊胜故。当财物相等时,偷取有德者之物,罪过大;偷取功德较浅者之物,罪过则小。显示巴利原文
Adinnādānaṃ pahāyāti ettha adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parasaṃharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti. Tasmiṃ parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino, tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ, kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ . Taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ.
这种不与取具备五种资粮(构成要素):他人所有之物、作他人所有物想、盗心、方法,以及凭此而取。六种手段(努力):亲手偷取等即是。而这些相应的不与取,正是依以下诸种偷盗方式而进行:偷窃而取、强夺而取、隐蔽而取、算计而取、巧取而取。此乃此处之概要,详细解说见于《一切善见》。显示巴利原文
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti. Cha payogā – sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, paṭicchannāvahāro, parikappāvahāro, kusāvahāroti imesaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattā, ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.
“只取所施者”(dinnādāyī),即只接受已经施与的东西。“只期许所施者”(dinnapāṭikaṅkhī),即内心也仅期许那些已经施与之物。“贼”(thena),是因其偷盗。“无贼”(athena),即没有贼盗的状态。正因无贼盗,故为“以清净为自性者”(sucibhūta)。“自己”(attanā),即指自身。因此,这句话的意思即是:以自身转为清净之身而安住。其余内容,当依第一学处中所述的方法来融通。如同此处,于一切处亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Dinnameva ādiyatīti dinnādāyī. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhatīti dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Thenetīti theno. Na thenena athenena. Athenattāyeva sucibhūtena. Attanāti attabhāvena. Athenaṃ sucibhūtaṃ attānaṃ katvā viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha.
“非梵行”(abrahmacariyaṃ),指非最胜行。修行梵天最胜行的人,称为“梵行者”(brahmacārī)。“远离行者”(ārācārī),即远离非梵行之人。“淫欲法”(methunā):因贪欲随眠而彼此相似的众生,被称为“行淫欲者”;由于是他们所行之法,故将这类秽恶法称为“淫欲法”。“秽恶法”(gāmadhammā),即村邑之人的法。显示巴利原文
Abrahmacariyanti aseṭṭhacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratīti brahmacārī. Ārācārīti abrahmacariyato dūracārī. Methunāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasena sadisattā methunakāti laddhavohārehi paṭisevitabbato methunāti saṅkhyaṃ gatā asaddhammā. Gāmadhammāti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammā.
9 “断除妄语”中,“妄”是指以欺骗为先、破坏真舍利益的言语行为或身行;或者,怀有欺骗他人的意图,由此生起令他人受骗的身业或语业之思,称为“妄语”。显示巴利原文
9.Musāvādaṃ pahāyāti ettha musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjanako vacīpayogo kāyapayogo, vā visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo.
又有一种解释:“妄”指不真实、不正确的对象。“语”是将此对象当作真实、正确而告知。从特相上说,对于不真实的对象,想要令他人以为真实,由此生起那告知之思,便是妄语。此妄语所破坏的利益轻微,罪过便轻;所破坏的利益重大,罪过便重。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo, ‘musā’ti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. ‘Vādo’ti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo.
再者,在家之人,因不愿布施己物而说“没有”等,依此方式生起的妄语罪过较轻;若身为证人,为破坏他人利益而说妄语,罪过则重。出家之人,得到少许油或酥油后,为嬉笑而说“今日村中油犹如河流在流吧”,如此以夸大之谈而生起的妄语罪过较轻;若对未见之事说“见”等,依此方式生起的妄语罪过则重。显示巴利原文
Api ca gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthītiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo, pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena – ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo.
妄语具有四个构成条件:不实之事、欺骗之心、相应的努力、他人了知该义。其方式唯有一种,即亲自施行。应理解为:通过身体、身体所系之物或言语,作出欺骗他人的行为。若以此行为令他人了知该义,则在发动行为之思的刹那,便为妄语业所缚。显示巴利原文
Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā paravisaṃvādanakiriyākaraṇena daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyasamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
然而,正如有以身体、身体所系之物或言语欺骗他人者,同样,那些命令他人‘去对他说如是之言’者,或写好文书置于他人面前者,或在墙壁等处书写‘此义应作如是观’并留置者,亦复如是。因此,这里的教令、留置、固定等方便也都合理,但由于诸注释书中未曾提及,故须审察后方予采纳。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana yathā kāyakāyapaṭibaddhavācāhi paraṃ visaṃvādeti, tathā ‘‘idamassa bhaṇāhī’’ti āṇāpentopi paṇṇaṃ likhitvā purato nissajjantopi, ‘‘ayamattho evaṃ daṭṭhabbo’’ti kuḍḍādīsu likhitvā ṭhapentopi. Tasmā ettha āṇattikanissaggiyathāvarāpi payogā yujjanti, aṭṭhakathāsu pana anāgatattā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā.
说真实故,名为‘谛语者’。以真实连接真实、使之契合故,名为‘谛连接者’。其义为:彼不夹杂而说妄语。有些人时而说妄语、时而说真实,由于妄语间隔杂入,真实便无法与真实相接,故此人并非‘谛连接者’。而此比丘则不然,纵为活命亦不说妄语,唯以真实连接真实,故为‘谛连接者’。显示巴利原文
Saccaṃ vadatīti saccavādī. Saccena saccaṃ sandahati ghaṭetīti saccasandho. Na antarantarā musā vadatīti attho. Yo hi puriso kadāci musā vadati, kadāci saccaṃ, tassa musāvādena antaritattā saccaṃ saccena na ghaṭīyati; tasmā so na saccasandho. Ayaṃ pana na tādiso, jīvitahetupi musā avatvā saccena saccaṃ sandahati yevāti saccasandho.
“坚定者”指坚固、言语坚定的人。有一种人并非言语坚定:如同姜黄之色容易褪失,如同谷壳堆中插立的木桩容易动摇,如同马背上安放的葫芦容易滚落;另一种人则如石上刻字、如因陀罗柱,言语坚定,即使被人以刀砍头,也不会说出两种话。这种人称为“坚定者”。显示巴利原文
Thetoti thiro thirakathoti attho. Eko hi puggalo haliddirāgo viya, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇu viya, assapiṭṭhe ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍamiva ca na thirakatho hoti, eko pāsāṇalekhā viya, indakhīlo viya ca thirakatho hoti, asinā sīsaṃ chindantepi dve kathā na katheti, ayaṃ vuccati theto.
“可信赖的”:指值得信任、值得相信。有一种人并不可信赖,当被告知“这话是某某说的”时,他人可能会说“别信他的话”;另一种人则是可信赖的,当被告知“这话是某某说的”时,你会说:“既然是他所说,这便足以为准,根本无须再作查证,事实正是如此。”这样的人称为可信赖者。“不欺骗世间者”:凭其说真实语的特质而不欺骗世间,这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbako, saddhāyitabbakoti attho. Ekacco hi puggalo na paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte ‘‘mā tassa vacanaṃ saddahathā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Eko paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte ‘‘yadi tena vuttaṃ, idameva pamāṇaṃ, idāni upaparikkhitabbaṃ natthi, evameva ida’’nti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ vuccati paccayiko. Avisaṃvādako lokassāti tāya saccavāditāya lokaṃ na visaṃvādetīti attho.
在「舍弃离间语」等教导中,所谓「离间语」,是指当某人用那些话对某人说时,能让对方心中对自己生起喜爱,却让对方心里对他人产生疏离、空落落的感受,这种语言就是离间语。显示巴利原文
Pisuṇaṃvācaṃ pahāyātiādīsu yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ, parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā.
「粗恶语」:以那种话语对自己或他人说时,这言语本身就是粗恶的,既不悦耳,亦不深入人心,此即名为粗恶语。显示巴利原文
Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusaṃ karoti, yā vācā sayampi pharusā, neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayaṅgamā, ayaṃ pharusā vācā.
「绮语」:以那杂乱无义的方式而说,便是绮语。显示巴利原文
Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo.
那些言语的根本——思心所,同样被称作离间语等,此处所指正是这一思。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ mūlabhūtā cetanāpi pisuṇavācādināmeva labhati, sā eva ca idhādhippetāti.
其中,心被染污者,为离间他人,或为自己求取他人喜爱的渴望,而发起身行、语行之思,此即离间语。若离间某人,其人德行微少则罪过轻微,德行广大则罪过深重。显示巴利原文
Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇavācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā.
离间语具足四支:所应离间的他人;以“令其分裂、分离”为先导的离间心,或以“令我成为可爱、可信之人”为动机的求爱之心;相符的精进;以及对此义的了知。所谓“为了离间他们”,即是为了使前面所说的那些人,在听闻之后,彼此分裂。显示巴利原文
Tassā cattāro sambhārā – bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti, vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā, ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti. Imesaṃ bhedāyāti, yesaṃ itoti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ tesaṃ bhedāya.
“令已分裂者和合者”:对于两位朋友,或同依一亲教师等,由于某种原因而分裂之人,能各自分别前往他们那里,说道:“像你们这般生于如此家族、如此多闻的人,做这种事是不合宜的”等语,从而成为和合的造作者、再推动者。“随附者”:即和合的随给与者。见到二众已然和合时,便说:“像你们这般生于如此家族、具有如此德行的人,做这样的事才合宜”等,以使他们的和合更为坚固。这就是它的意义。“以和合为乐住”:以和合为自己乐住的所在。意思是,在没有和合的地方,他连安居都不愿意。又有经文作“和合乐住”,意义相同。“乐于和合”:乐于安住和合之中,不愿舍此而住他处,这是它的意思。“见和合而欢喜,闻和合而欢喜”:由此成为和合欢喜者。“说和合语”:凡能令众生成就和合的语言,便只说那些彰显和合功德的言语,不说其余。显示巴利原文
Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātāti dvinnaṃ mittānaṃ vā samānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ vā kenacideva kāraṇena bhinnānaṃ ekamekaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ īdise kule jātānaṃ evaṃ bahussutānaṃ idaṃ na yutta’’ntiādīni vatvā sandhānaṃ kattā anukattā. Anuppadātāti sandhānānuppadātā. Dve jane samagge disvā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ evarūpe kule jātānaṃ evarūpehi guṇehi samannāgatānaṃ anucchavikameta’’ntiādīni vatvā daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho. Samaggo ārāmo assāti samaggārāmo. Yattha samaggā natthi, tattha vasitumpi na icchatīti attho. Samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho. Samaggaratoti samaggesu rato, te pahāya aññattha gantumpi na icchatīti attho. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatīti samagganandī,samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti yā vācā satte samaggeyeva karoti , taṃ sāmaggiguṇaparidīpikameva vācaṃ bhāsati, na itaranti.
“粗恶语”是指能引发伤害他人要害的身行和语行之思,一种全然粗暴的思。为说明此,有这样一个事例:据说有个男孩不听母亲的话,跑到森林里去。母亲拦不住他,便咒骂说:“愿一头凶恶的水牛去追你!”结果,森林里真的出现了一头水牛。男孩于是作了真实誓言:“愿我母亲口中所说之事不要发生,愿她心中所想之事得以发生。”那水牛便像被绑住一样,停在那里不动。如此,即使行为看似在伤害要害,但因心柔软,也不构成粗恶语。实际上,父母有时会对孩子们说:“愿强盗把你们剁成碎片!”可心里,连一片青莲花瓣落在他们身上都不愿意。戒师与老师们有时也会对依止他们的人说:“这些无惭无愧的人到处晃什么?把他们赶出去!”内心深处却盼着他们获得教法和证悟的成就。因此,当心柔软时,即便言语粗鲁,也不成粗恶语;同样,言语柔和,也不一定就不是粗恶语。譬如有人想杀人,说“让他舒舒服服地躺着吧”,这句话因为心的粗暴,仍然是粗恶语。这种粗恶语,若所针对的对象功德小,则罪过小;功德大,则罪过大。它有三个构成要素:被辱骂的对象、忿显示巴利原文
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusacetanā pharusāvācā. Tassā āvibhāvatthamidaṃ vatthu – eko kira dārako mātuvacanaṃ anādiyitvā araññaṃ gacchati, taṃ mātā nivattetumasakkontī – ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti akkosi. Athassa tatheva araññe mahiṃsī uṭṭhāsi. Dārako ‘‘yaṃ mama mātā mukhena kathesi, taṃ mā hotu, yaṃ cittena cintesi taṃ hotū’’ti, saccakiriyamakāsi. Mahiṃsī tattheva baddhā viya aṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya na pharusā vācā hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirīkā anottappino caranti, niddhamatha ne’’ti, atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusā vācā na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa – ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusā vācā hoti, cittapharusatāya panesā pharusā vācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
“无秽的”:ela 是指瞋恚;没有这种 ela,所以叫无秽(nelā),意思是无过失的。如同《优陀那》中“无秽支、白覆盖”所说的无秽一样。“耳悦的”:由于文词的甜美,令耳朵舒适,不会像针刺那般产生耳痛。“可爱的”:由于意义的甜美,不会引起全身的恼怒,反而能生起喜爱之情,故称可爱。“入心的”:能进入心,毫无障碍、舒适地进入心。“城市语的”:由于功德圆满,为都城所有,故称城市语;又因如同在都城里成长的女子一般柔和,所以也称城市语。或者说,这属于都城,即是都城居民的语言。都城居民说话确实很得体:他们称如同父亲的人为父亲,称如同兄弟的人为兄弟,称如同母亲的人为母亲。这样的语言为许许多多人所喜爱,故为“众所喜爱”;正因如此喜爱,对许多人来说是悦意、能令心增长的,故为“众所悦意”。显示巴利原文
Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso, nāssā elanti nelā, niddosāti attho. ‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti, (udā. 65) ettha vuttanelaṃ viya. Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā, sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetīti pemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati, appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatīti hadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavāti porī pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī. Purassa esātipi porī. Nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti. Pitimattaṃ pitāti vadanti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti, mātimattaṃ mātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotīti bahujanakantā. Kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuḍḍhikarāti bahujanamanāpā.
“绮语”是指能传达无义之事、并生起身行和语行的不善思。它因串习轻微而罪过小,因串习重大而罪过大。它有两个资粮:一是以讲述“婆罗多战争”、“掠走悉多”等无义故事为先导;二是说出那样的言语。显示巴利原文
Anatthaviññāpikā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo, tassa dve sambhārā – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpī kathā kathanañca.
适时而说者,名为「适时语者」——即善察应说之时而后说。说真实、如实、不虚、说事物本来面目者,是「实语者」。唯以现世利益与后世利益为依归而说者,是「义利语者」。依九种出世间法而说者,是「法语者」。依律制与律之断止而说者,是「律语者」。显示巴利原文
Kālena vadatīti kālavādī vattabbayuttakālaṃ sallakkhetvā vadatīti attho. Bhūtaṃ tathaṃ tacchaṃ sabhāvameva vadatīti bhūtavādī. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthasannissitameva katvā vadatīti atthavādī. Navalokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti dhammavādī saṃvaravinayapahānavinayasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti vinayavādī.
「置放处」(nidhāna),即安立存放之处。具有此置放处者,名为「有置放处之语」——即说应铭记心中之语。「适时」:纵使说如此之语,亦不于非时宣称「我当说有分量之语」,唯观恰当时机而说。「有譬喻」:即有譬喻,亦具理由之义。「有边际」:即显示界限,令知其范围而如是说。「与义利相应」:由种种方便审察亦难穷尽故,其语具足圆满义利;或复,彼义利语者正说利益时,言辞与彼利益相应,故名与义利相应之语——即不舍一义而另说他义。显示巴利原文
Nidhānaṃ vuccati ṭhapanokāso, nidhānamassā atthīti nidhānavatī. Hadaye nidhātabbayuttakaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti attho. Kālenāti evarūpiṃ bhāsamānopi ca – ‘‘ahaṃ nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsissāmī’’ti na akālena bhāsati, yuttakālaṃ pana apekkhitvāva bhāsatīti attho. Sāpadesanti saupamaṃ, sakāraṇanti attho. Pariyantavatinti paricchedaṃ dassetvā yathāssā paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatīti attho. Atthasaṃhitanti anekehipi nayehi vibhajantena pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya atthasampannaṃ bhāsati. Yaṃ vā so atthavādī atthaṃ vadati, tena atthena sahitattā atthasaṃhitaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, na aññaṃ nikkhipitvā aññaṃ bhāsatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
10 「种子类与植物类的伤害」:种子类有五种,即根种子、茎种子、节种子、插枝种子、种种子;植物类则指任何青草、树木等。对于这些,以切、裂、烧煮等方式进行破坏,便构成伤害。比丘远离这种伤害行为。显示巴利原文
10.Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhāti mūlabījaṃ khandhabījaṃ phaḷubījaṃ aggabījaṃ bījabījanti pañcavidhassa bījagāmassa ceva, yassa kassaci nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa bhūtagāmassa ca samārambhā, chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvena vikopanā paṭiviratoti attho.
“一食者”:早餐与晚餐,此二食中,早餐以正午为界限;另一种则是正午之后、明相出现之前。因此,即使在正午前吃了十次,也仍然是一食者。所谓“一食者”,正是就此而言。显示巴利原文
Ekabhattikoti pātarāsabhattaṃ sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni, tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ, itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ anto aruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānopi ekabhattikova hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekabhattiko’’ti.
夜晚的食物名为夜食,由此夜食远离,故称“远离夜食者”。正午之后至日落之间所食的食物,名为非时食。因从此非时食中远离,故为“远离非时食者”。何时远离?自于阿诺玛河畔出家之日起。显示巴利原文
Rattiyā bhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatoti rattūparato. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma. Tato viratattā virato vikālabhojanā. Kadā virato? Anomānadītīre pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya.
因与教法不相随顺,故为障碍、如荆棘般的观看,称“障碍见”。自己跳舞、教人跳舞等,以及歌舞、奏乐,乃至孔雀舞等,这些均成障碍,观看这些便名为“歌舞伎乐等障碍见”。因为这些舞蹈等,无论自己作、令他人作,还是看他人作,对比丘与比丘尼皆不相宜。显示巴利原文
Sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā cāti naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā. Naccādīni hi attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnañca vaṭṭanti.
于花鬘等中,所谓“花”即任何花,“香”即任何香料,“涂香”即能润泽皮肤之物。此处,佩戴于身称为“戴”,用以补足缺陷之处称为“庄严”,因香气与色泽而受用称为“装饰”。“处”指理由、原因。因此,其意为:远离世间人出于下劣思心而作戴花鬘等事的原因。显示巴利原文
Mālādīsu mālāti yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃ kiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Tattha piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma, ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāma. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ. Tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, tato paṭiviratoti attho.
“高床”指超过规定尺寸的床座,“大床”指不如法的铺设物。远离这些。显示巴利原文
Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ. Mahāsayananti akappiyapaccattharaṇaṃ. Tato viratoti attho.
“生色”即黄金;“银”即货币、铜钱、树胶钱、木钱等进入流通之物。远离执受此二者,意即:自己既不取,不令他人取,亦不受用他人放在近处之物。显示巴利原文
Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo, lohamāsako, jatumāsako, dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti. Tassa ubhayassāpi paṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato, neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatīti attho.
“接受生谷”:指接受七种生谷,即粳米、稻谷、大麦、小麦、黍、稗子和穇子。比丘们不仅不能接受这些生谷,连触碰也不得。至于“接受生肉”:在此,除了个别开许的情况外,比丘们不得接受生肉和生鱼,但触碰它们则无妨碍。显示巴利原文
Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇāti, sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsakasaṅkhātassa sattavidhassāpi āmakadhaññassa paṭiggahaṇā. Na kevalañca etesaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva, āmasanampi bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha aññatra odissa anuññātā āmakamaṃsamacchānaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭati, no āmasanaṃ.
“接受女人与少女”:在此,“女人”指已有与男子交往经历的女性,其余则称为“少女”。对她们,无论是接受还是触碰,均不如法。显示巴利原文
Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha itthīti purisantaragatā, itarā kumārikā nāma, tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇampi āmasanampi akappiyameva.
“接受奴婢”:在此,只要是依于奴婢的身份来接受,即不被允许。然而若说:‘我给您一位作净者,我给您一位寺男。’这样则是允许的。显示巴利原文
Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha dāsidāsavaseneva tesaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Kappiyakārakaṃ dammi, ārāmikaṃ dammī’’ti evaṃ vutte pana vaṭṭati.
对于羊等牲畜乃至田、地等事物,哪些是许可的,哪些是不许可的,应当依据律藏来审查。其中,“田”是指生长谷类等早熟作物之处;“地”是指生长豆、瓜等晚熟作物之处。若一处两类皆可生长,亦名为田。为这些田、地而预备、尚未开垦的土地部分,则称为地。此处以田、地为代表,实际上也涵括了水池、水塘等在内。显示巴利原文
Ajeḷakādīsu khettavatthupariyosānesu kappiyākappiyanayo vinayavasena upaparikkhitabbo. Tattha khettaṃ nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati, taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya akatabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpitaḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāneva.
“信使工作”是指充当使者的差事,即拿着在家人托付的书信或口信,四处奔走传递。“被派遣的奔走”是指受人差遣、挨家挨户办理的零星杂事。“从事”则指操持这两类差事。因此,“不从事信使工作和被派遣的奔走”一句的意思,应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Dūteyyaṃ vuccati dūtakammaṃ, gihīnaṃ pahitaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Pahiṇagamanaṃ vuccati gharā gharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ. Anuyogo nāma tadubhayakaraṇaṃ. Tasmā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānaṃ anuyogāti. Evamettha attho veditabbo.
“买卖”即是买与卖。在“秤杆欺诈等”中,“欺诈”是指欺骗手段。其中,秤杆欺诈有四种:外形欺诈、手把欺诈、执绳欺诈和暗藏欺诈。所谓“外形欺诈”,是指制作两个形状相同而分量不同的秤,收进时用重的那个,付出时则用轻的那个。所谓“手把欺诈”,是指收进时用手从后方压住秤杆,付出时则从前方压住。所谓“执绳欺诈”,是指收进时握住提绳的根部,付出时则握住绳梢。所谓“暗藏欺诈”,是指将秤杆挖空、内填铁粉,收进时使藏有铁粉的那端朝后,付出时使其朝前。显示巴利原文
Kayavikkayāti kayā ca vikkayā ca. Tulākūṭādīsu kūṭanti vañcanaṃ. Tattha tulākūṭaṃ nāma rūpakūṭaṃ aṅgakūṭaṃ, gahaṇakūṭaṃ, paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha rūpakūṭaṃ nāma dve tulā samarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti. Aṅgakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ nāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge.
「金钵」是指金制的钵盘,藉此欺骗则名为「金钵欺诈」。如何进行呢?欺诈者先制作一个真金钵,再将另外两三个铜钵做成金色,然后前往别处,走进某户富家,说道:“请买这些金器。”当对方询问价格并表示愿出一个相称的价钱时,便问:“怎样才能知道这些是纯金的?”欺诈者回答:“您先检验再买也不迟。”他便用石块将那个真金钵擦拭一番,随后把所有的钵都交给对方便离去了。显示巴利原文
Kaṃso vuccati suvaṇṇapāti, tāya vañcanaṃ kaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇe karoti, tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva aḍḍhaṃ kulaṃ pavisitvā – ‘‘suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi – ‘‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vutte, ‘‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbā pātiyo datvā gacchati.
「计量欺诈」有三种,即底部穿孔、刮平尖顶和拉绳手脚。其中,底部穿孔是在称量酥油等液体时发生。收进时,他用底部穿孔的量器,先嘱咐“慢慢倒”,让油大量从下方漏入自己的容器后收进;付出时,却堵住穿孔,迅速灌满后交付。显示巴利原文
Mānakūṭaṃ nāma hadayabhedasikhābhedarajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha hadayabhedo sappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhāchiddena mānena – ‘‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’’ti vatvā antobhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti.
「刮平尖顶」是在称量芝麻、大米等颗粒物时发生。收进时,他慢慢让斗斛中的谷物堆起高高的尖顶后收进;付出时,却迅速装满并把尖顶刮平再交付。显示巴利原文
Sikhābhedo tilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti.
“拉绳手脚”发生在丈量田地、宅基地之时。那些得不到贿赂的官员,便把本不大的田地,拉绳丈量成一块大田。显示巴利原文
Rajjubhedo khettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Lañjaṃ alabhantā hi khettaṃ amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti.
在“强行索回”等词中,“强行索回”指收受贿赂,将无主之物硬说成有主之物。“欺骗”指以种种手段骗人。这里有一个事例:据说有位猎人捉来一只鹿和一只小鹿。一个骗子问道:“喂,鹿值多少,小鹿又值多少?”猎人说:“鹿两个咖哈巴那,小鹿一个。”骗子便给了一个咖哈巴那,拿走了小鹿。走了不远又折返回来,说:“小鹿我不要了,把鹿给我吧。”猎人说:“那就给两个咖哈巴那。”骗子说:“朋友,我不是已经给了你一个咖哈巴那了吗?”猎人答:“是的,给过了。”骗子便说:“那把这小鹿拿回去。这样,那一个咖哈巴那,加上这只也值一个咖哈巴那的小鹿,正好就是两个咖哈巴那了。”猎人寻思:“说得倒也有理。”便收回小鹿,把鹿给了他。“诈骗”指利用手段或幻术,把不是首饰的说成首饰,不是宝石的说成宝石,不是黄金的说成黄金,以假乱真而行骗。“诡计结合”即弯曲不直的结合,实则正是对上述“强行索回”等种种手段的总称。因此应这样理解其义:“强行索回”的诡计结合、“欺骗”的诡计结合、“诈骗”的诡计结显示巴利原文
Ukkoṭanādīsu ukkoṭananti assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ. Vañcananti tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati , tameko dhutto – ‘‘kiṃ bho, migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe, migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte ekaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto – ‘‘na me bho, migapotakena attho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi – dve kahāpaṇe dehīti. So āha – ‘‘nanu te bho, mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti? ‘‘Āma, dinno’’ti. ‘‘Idaṃ migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo, ayañca kahāpaṇagghanako migapotakoti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantī’’ti. So ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti. Nikatīti yogavasena vā māyāvasena vā apāmaṅgaṃ pāmaṅganti, amaṇiṃ maṇinti, asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti katvā patirūpakena vañcanaṃ. Sāciyogoti kuṭilayogo, etesaṃyeva ukkoṭanādīnametaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā – ukkoṭanasāciyogo, vañcanasāciyogo, nikatisāciyogoti, evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Keci aññaṃ dassetvā aññassa parivattanaṃ sāciyogoti vadanti. Taṃ pana vañcaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.
在“砍断”等词中,“砍断”指砍断手等。“杀害”指杀死。“捆绑”指以绳索等捆绑。“抢劫”有两种:雪中抢劫与树丛中抢劫。下雪之时,以雪覆身,劫掠行路之人,称为雪中抢劫;以树丛等遮蔽自身而劫掠,称为树丛中抢劫。“掠夺”指对村庄、城镇等进行洗劫。“暴力行为”指凶暴之举,即闯入他人家中,以刀抵住人们胸膛,抢夺所需之物。从这样的“砍断”……乃至“暴力行为”中远离,就是乔达摩沙门。比丘们,凡夫在称赞如来时,或许会以这样的方式称赞。显示巴利原文
Chedanādīsu chedananti hatthacchedanādi. Vadhoti māraṇaṃ. Bandhoti rajjubandhanādīhi bandhanaṃ. Viparāmosoti himaviparāmoso, gumbaviparāmosoti duvidho. Yaṃ himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggappaṭipannaṃ janaṃ musanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gumbādīhi paṭicchannā musanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso. Ālopo vuccati gāmanigamādīnaṃ vilopakaraṇaṃ. Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā. Gehaṃ pavisitvā manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Evametasmā chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamoti. Iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyāti.
中戒注释显示巴利原文
Majjhimasīlavaṇṇanā
11 现在,为详细解释中戒,而说“然而,正如某些尊敬的……”等。此处对不易理解的词句,注释如下:“信施之物”指因信受业、信受果报、信受此世、信受他世而布施之物。若施与时心想“这是我的亲戚”、“这是我的朋友”、“他将来会回报我”、“他曾为我做过此事”,以如此心态给出之物,则不称为“信施之物”。所谓“食物”仅是开示的引端,实则涵盖受用信施食物、穿着信施衣服、居住信施坐卧处、使用信施医药等一切受用。显示巴利原文
11. Idāni majjhimasīlaṃ vitthārento ‘‘yathā vā paneke bhonto’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā. Saddhādeyyānīti kammañca phalañca idhalokañca paralokañca saddahitvā dinnāni. ‘Ayaṃ me ñātī’ti vā, ‘mitto’ti vā, idaṃ paṭikarissati, idaṃ vā tena katapubbanti vā, evaṃ na dinnānīti attho. Evaṃ dinnāni hi na saddhādeyyāni nāma honti . Bhojanānīti desanāsīsamattametaṃ, atthato pana saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā cīvarāni pārupitvā senāsanāni sevamānā gilānabhesajjaṃ paribhuñjamānāti sabbametaṃ vuttameva hoti.
“即这些”是不变词。其意为:哪些是种子聚与草木聚——他们以损害这些为生?接着,为说明这些,而说“根种子”等。其中,“根种子”指姜黄、生姜、菖蒲、白菖蒲、阿提毗萨、苦味胡黄连、香根草、极妙豆等。“茎种子”指菩提树、榕树、波罗叉树、乌敦跋罗树、卡恰卡树、木苹果树等。“节种子”指甘蔗、竹、芦苇等。“插枝种子”指阿迦草、法尼迦草、希利维拉草等。“种子种子”指最初的谷物及后来的谷物等。凡从树上分离后仍具生长能力的,即称为“种子聚”;而尚在树上、未分离、未干枯的,则称为“草木聚”。此处当知:损害草木聚犯波逸提,损害种子聚犯恶作。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti nipāto. Tassattho katamo so bījagāmabhūtagāmo, yassa samārambhaṃ anuyuttā viharantīti. Tato taṃ dassento mūlabījantiādimāha. Tattha mūlabījaṃ nāma haliddi, siṅgiveraṃ, vacā, vacattaṃ, ativisā, kaṭukarohiṇī, usīraṃ, bhaddamuttakanti evamādi. Khandhabījaṃ nāma assattho, nigrodho, pilakkho, udumbaro, kacchako, kapitthanoti evamādi. Phaḷubījaṃ nāma ucchu, naḷo, veḷūti evamādi. Aggabījaṃ nāma ajjakaṃ, phaṇijjakaṃ, hiriveranti evamādi. Bījabījaṃ nāma pubbaṇṇaṃ aparaṇṇanti evamādi. Sabbañhetaṃ rukkhato viyojitaṃ viruhanasamatthameva ‘‘bījagāmo’’ti vuccati. Rukkhato pana aviyojitaṃ asukkhaṃ ‘‘bhūtagāmo’’ti vuccati. Tattha bhūtagāmasamārambho pācittiyavatthu, bījagāmasamārambho dukkaṭavatthūti veditabbo.
12 “储存物的受用”指受用已储存的食物。对此有两种论说:依律与依少欲。就律而言,凡是今日接受的食物,至第二日便成为储存物,若受用则犯波逸提。然而,若将自己所得食物交给沙弥,令其存放,次日再食,这是允许的,但如此行为并不称为少欲。显示巴利原文
12.Sannidhikāraparibhoganti sannidhikatassa paribhogaṃ. Tattha duvidhā kathā, vinayavasena ca sallekhavasena ca. Vinayavasena tāva yaṃ kiñci annaṃ ajja paṭiggahitaṃ aparajju sannidhikārakaṃ hoti, tassa paribhoge pācittiyaṃ . Attanā laddhaṃ pana sāmaṇerānaṃ datvā, tehi laddhaṃ ṭhapāpetvā dutiyadivase bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, sallekho pana na hoti.
「饮料的储存」亦同此理。这里所说的饮料,指芒果饮料等八种饮料,以及与这八种相顺应的饮料。其详细辨析于《一切善见》中已有说明。显示巴利原文
Pānasannidhimhipi eseva nayo. Tattha pānaṃ nāma ambapānādīni aṭṭha pānāni, yāni ca tesaṃ anulomāni. Tesaṃ vinicchayo samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.
「衣物的储存」:若对衣物不决意、不作净施而存放,即成为储存并损害少欲,这是方便说。从严格义而言,应当满足于三衣;若得第四件衣,则应施与他人。若无法施给任何人,而心中想施与某位比丘,但该比丘因去听闻法义或请教问题外出了,则当他回来时应立刻施与;不施与是不允许的。若因衣不足而怀有期待,可存放到许可的期限。若因缺少针、线或制衣之人等,通过如法的僧团羯磨,可存放超过该期限。但若这样想:‘等这件衣破旧时,我还能从何处得到像这样的衣呢?’而存放,是不允许的;这即成为储存并损害少欲。显示巴利原文
Vatthasannidhimhi anadhiṭṭhitaṃ avikappitaṃ sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti, ayaṃ pariyāyakathā. Nippariyāyato pana ticīvarasantuṭṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, catutthaṃ labhitvā aññassa dātabbaṃ. Sace yassa kassaci dātuṃ na sakkoti, yassa pana dātukāmo hoti, so uddesatthāya vā paripucchatthāya vā gato, āgatamatte dātabbaṃ, adātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Cīvare pana appahonte satiyā paccāsāya anuññātakālaṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sūcisuttacīvarakārakānaṃ alābhena tato parampi vinayakammaṃ katvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Imasmiṃ jiṇṇe puna īdisaṃ kuto labhissāmī’’ti pana ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
「车乘的储存」:所谓「车乘」,是指轿子、马车、货车、沙地车、床舆、板舆等;这些并非出家人的车乘。然而,凉鞋才是出家人的车乘。一位比丘可拥有一双凉鞋用于前往阿兰若,另一双用于洗脚后穿着,因此最多允许有两双凉鞋。若得第三双,应施与他人。若这样想:‘等这双凉鞋坏了,我从何处再得到一双呢?’而存放,是不允许的;这即成为储存并损害少欲。显示巴利原文
Yānasannidhimhi yānaṃ nāma vayhaṃ, ratho, sakaṭaṃ, sandamānikā, sivikā, pāṭaṅkīti; netaṃ pabbajitassa yānaṃ. Upāhanā pana pabbajitassa yānaṃyeva. Ekabhikkhussa hi eko araññatthāya, eko dhotapādakatthāyāti, ukkaṃsato dve upāhanasaṅghāṭā vaṭṭanti. Tatiyaṃ labhitvā aññassa dātabbo. ‘‘Imasmiṃ jiṇṇe aññaṃ kuto labhissāmī’’ti hi ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
关于卧具储存:「床」指卧具。一位比丘在一间小室,加上一处白天的用功处,最多两张床是适宜的。若所得超过此数,应施与其他比丘或僧团;若不施舍,则不如法。如此既成‘储存’,也损害了少欲的修行。显示巴利原文
Sayanasannidhimhi sayananti mañco. Ekassa bhikkhuno eko gabbhe, eko divāṭhāneti ukkaṃsato dve mañcā vaṭṭanti. Tato uttari labhitvā aññassa bhikkhuno vā gaṇassa vā dātabbo; adātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
关于香的储存:比丘患有疥疮、皮肤病等疾病时,使用香是如法的。取来香后,待该疾病痊愈,应施与其他患病者,或用于门口等处,作五指屋的熏香等用途。但若抱着‘将来再生病时会用到’的念头而存放,则不如法。如此既成‘储存’,也损害了少欲的修行。显示巴利原文
Gandhasannidhimhi bhikkhuno kaṇḍukacchuchavidosādiābādhe sati gandhā vaṭṭanti. Te gandhe āharāpetvā tasmiṃ roge vūpasante aññesaṃ vā ābādhikānaṃ dātabbā, dvāre pañcaṅguligharadhūpanādīsu vā upanetabbā. ‘‘Puna roge sati bhavissantī’’ti pana ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
所谓‘食物’,应知是指前述之余事。即:有比丘心想:‘届时可派上用场。’便令人取来芝麻、米、绿豆、黄豆、椰子、盐、鱼、肉、肉干、酥油、糖蜜以及容器等,加以存放。到了雨季,他一大早就让沙弥们煮粥,自己受用后,对沙弥说:‘沙弥,踏着泥水进村很辛苦,你去某家告诉他们,我就安住在寺院里;从某家取来奶酪等物。’若有比丘问:‘尊者,您要进村吗?’他便推脱说:‘贤友,现在进村很困难。’比丘们便说:‘好吧,尊者,您们安住,我们去乞食来。’随即离去。随后沙弥取来奶酪等,备好饭菜奉上。正当他吃着时,施主们又送来饭食,他便从中挑选合意的吃。之后比丘们持团食回来,他又从中挑选喜爱的,伸长脖子受用。如此度过四个月。此人被称为:‘比丘过着剃除须发的在家人生活,而非沙门的活命方式。’像这样的,即名为食物储存。显示巴利原文
Āmisanti vuttāvasesaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, idhekacco bhikkhu – ‘‘tathārūpe kāle upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti tilataṇḍulamuggamāsanāḷikeraloṇamacchamaṃsavallūrasappitelaguḷabhājanādīni āharāpetvā ṭhapeti. So vassakāle kālasseva sāmaṇerehi yāguṃ pacāpetvā paribhuñjitvā ‘‘sāmaṇera, udakakaddame dukkhaṃ gāmaṃ pavisituṃ, gaccha asukaṃ kulaṃ gantvā mayhaṃ vihāre nisinnabhāvaṃ ārocehi; asukakulato dadhiādīni āharā’’ti peseti. Bhikkhūhi – ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, gāmaṃ pavisissathā’’ti vuttepi, ‘‘duppaveso, āvuso, idāni gāmo’’ti vadati. Te – ‘‘hotu, bhante, acchatha tumhe, mayaṃ bhikkhaṃ pariyesitvā āharissāmā’’ti gacchanti. Atha sāmaṇeropi dadhiādīni āharitvā bhattañca byañjanañca sampādetvā upaneti, taṃ bhuñjantasseva upaṭṭhākā bhattaṃ pahiṇanti, tatopi manāpaṃ manāpaṃ bhuñjati. Atha bhikkhū piṇḍapātaṃ gahetvā āgacchanti, tatopi manāpaṃ manāpaṃ gīvāyāmakaṃ bhuñjatiyeva. Evaṃ catumāsampi vītināmeti. Ayaṃ vuccati – ‘‘bhikkhu muṇḍakuṭumbikajīvikaṃ jīvati, na samaṇajīvika’’nti. Evarūpo āmisasannidhi nāma hoti.
然而,比丘可在住所中储存一升米、一块糖蜜、约四分之一份的酥油,这是允许的。这是为了应付不时到来的盗贼。因为若连这点饮食的款待也得不到,他们甚至会夺取性命。因此,若无储备,让人取来存放也是允许的。在身体不适时,这些物品中如法合宜者,也可自行取用。而在如法的小屋中,即便存放了较多物品,也不称为“储存”。于如来而言,无论是一升米等物,还是一肘长的布片,都不会为了“我今日或明日当用此”而加以存放。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhuno pana vasanaṭṭhāne ekā taṇḍulanāḷi, eko guḷapiṇḍo, catubhāgamattaṃ sappīti ettakaṃ nidhetuṃ vaṭṭati, akāle sampattacorānaṃ atthāya. Te hi ettakampi āmisapaṭisanthāraṃ alabhantā jīvitāpi voropeyyuṃ, tasmā sace ettakaṃ natthi, āharāpetvāpi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Aphāsukakāle ca yadettha kappiyaṃ, taṃ attanāpi paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kappiyakuṭiyaṃ pana bahuṃ ṭhapentassāpi sannidhi nāma natthi. Tathāgatassa pana taṇḍulanāḷiādīsu vā yaṃ kiñci caturatanamattaṃ vā pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘idaṃ me ajja vā sve vā bhavissatī’’ti ṭhapitaṃ nāma natthi.
13 13. 关于观览表演:“舞蹈”泛指任何种类的舞蹈,即便是在行路时,也不应伸长脖子去观看。至于微细的抉择,此处应依《一切善见》中所说的方式来了解。不仅此处如此,一切与学处相关的经文句也都如此。此后,我不再多说,仅随处解说其核心要义而已。显示巴利原文
13. Visūkadassanesu naccaṃ nāma yaṃ kiñci naccaṃ, taṃ maggaṃ gacchantenāpi gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhuṃ na vaṭṭati. Vitthāravinicchayo panettha samantapāsādikāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbesu sikkhāpadapaṭisaṃyuttesu suttapadesu. Ito parañhi ettakampi avatvā tattha tattha payojanamattameva vaṇṇayissāmāti.
“表演”指舞剧演员的集会。“说书”指讲说婆罗多大战等故事,在讲说之处,不应前往。“手乐”指铙钹,也有人称为掌乐。“韦塔尔”指铜钹鼓乐,也有人说是以咒术令尸体站起之法。“罐鼓”指四方形水罐式的鼓乐,也有人解释为罐子发出的声响。“庄严”指向演员抛撒物品,或指庄严的表演,即即兴表演。“旃陀罗”指铁球游戏,也有人说是旃陀罗阶层的人洗麻布的游戏。“竹”指竖立竹子进行的游戏。显示巴利原文
Pekkhanti naṭasamajjaṃ. Akkhānanti bhāratayujjhanādikaṃ. Yasmiṃ ṭhāne kathīyati, tattha gantumpi na vaṭṭati. Pāṇissaranti kaṃsatāḷaṃ, pāṇitāḷantipi vadanti. Vetāḷanti ghanatāḷaṃ, mantena matasarīruṭṭhāpanantipi eke. Kumbhathūṇanti caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃ, kumbhasaddantipi eke. Sobhanakanti naṭānaṃ abbhokkiraṇaṃ, sobhanakaraṃ vā, paṭibhānacittanti vuttaṃ hoti. Caṇḍālanti ayoguḷakīḷā, caṇḍālānaṃ sāṇadhovanakīḷātipi vadanti. Vaṃsanti veḷuṃ ussāpetvā kīḷanaṃ.
“洗”指洗骨。据说,在某些地方,亲属死后并不火化,而是埋葬安置。待得知尸体腐烂后,便掘出骨骸,清洗干净,并用香料涂抹后存放。每逢星宿节日,便将骨骸安置一处,将酒等物放置在另一处,一边哭泣悲叹,一边饮酒。经中也有说:“诸比丘,南方诸国中有一种称为‘洗骨’的仪式,那里有食、有饮、有嚼食、啖食、舐食、饮料,还有舞蹈、歌唱、音乐。诸比丘,这种‘洗’是存在的,我不说它不存在。”也有人认为,以幻术洗骨的方式也属于“洗”。显示巴利原文
Dhovananti aṭṭhidhovanaṃ, ekaccesu kira janapadesu kālaṅkate ñātake na jhāpenti, nikhaṇitvā ṭhapenti. Atha nesaṃ pūtibhūtaṃ kāyaṃ ñatvā nīharitvā aṭṭhīni dhovitvā gandhehi makkhetvā ṭhapenti. Te nakkhattakāle ekasmiṃ ṭhāne aṭṭhīni ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne surādīni ṭhapetvā rodantā paridevantā suraṃ pivanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave , dakkhiṇesu janapadesu aṭṭhidhovanaṃ nāma, tattha hoti annampi pānampi khajjampi bhojjampi leyyampi peyyampi naccampi gītampi vāditampi. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, dhovanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 10.107). Ekacce pana indajālena aṭṭhidhovanaṃ dhovanantipi vadanti.
象斗等:比丘不应与象等相斗,亦不应指使它们相斗,更不应观看正在打斗的场面。“搏斗”指力士相搏。“战阵”指可见兵刃交击之处。“军营”指清点兵力的地方。“军阵”指军队的驻扎,如以车阵等方式安营。“观军”指如经中所说“三头象是殿后的象军”等,即观看排列整齐的军阵。显示巴利原文
Hatthiyuddhādīsu bhikkhuno neva hatthiādīhi saddhiṃ yujjhituṃ, na te yujjhāpetuṃ, na yujjhante daṭṭhuṃ vaṭṭati. Nibbuddhanti mallayuddhaṃ. Uyyodhikanti yattha sampahāro dissati. Balagganti balagaṇanaṭṭhānaṃ. Senābyūhanti senāniveso, sakaṭabyūhādivasena senāya nivesanaṃ. Anīkadassananti – ‘‘tayo hatthī pacchimaṃ hatthānīka’’ntiādinā (pāci. 324) nayena vuttassa anīkassa dassanaṃ.
14 14. 放逸处:放逸安住于此中,故名放逸处。既是赌博又是放逸处,故名“赌博放逸处”。每一行各有八格,故名“八格戏”;十格戏亦然。“空中戏”:如同八格戏、十格戏那样,纯粹在空中进行的游戏。“取子棋”:在地上画出种种路径圈,须在各处移动棋子,是走路径者的游戏。“近取戏”:即近取游戏。将摆好的棋子或石子,不用直接移动,仅用指甲将其拨开或拨近;在此过程中,若有任何一枚移动,即算输,此游戏即因此得名。“骰戏”:指在赌博板上掷骰子的游戏。“击棍戏”:指用长棍击打短棍的游戏。“掌印戏”:以虫胶、紫矿汁或面粉水浸湿手掌,拍印于地或墙上,依印迹显示象、马等形象的游戏。“骰子”:指滚珠游戏。“叶哨”:指叶笛,吹响它来游戏。“曲犁”:指村童们玩的小玩具犁。“翻腾戏”:即翻转游戏——手执棍子在空中,或以头撑地,上下翻转而游戏,此即其义。“旋轮”:指用棕榈叶等制作、借风力旋转的轮子。“叶量”:指叶笛,用它来计量沙子等来游戏。“小车”:指小玩具车。“小弓”:指小玩具弓。“猜字”:指在空中或……显示巴利原文
14. Pamādo ettha tiṭṭhatīti pamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Jūtañca taṃ pamādaṭṭhānañcāti jūtappamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assāti aṭṭhapadaṃ dasapadepi eseva nayo. Ākāsanti aṭṭhapadadasapadesu viya ākāseyeva kīḷanaṃ. Parihārapathanti bhūmiyaṃ nānāpathamaṇḍalaṃ katvā tattha tattha pariharitabbaṃ, pathaṃ pariharantānaṃ kīḷanaṃ. Santikanti santikakīḷanaṃ. Ekajjhaṃ ṭhapitā sāriyo vā sakkharāyo vā acālentā nakheneva apanenti ca upanenti ca, sace tattha kāci calati, parājayo hoti, evarūpāya kīḷāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khalikanti jūtaphalake pāsakakīḷanaṃ. Ghaṭikā vuccati dīghadaṇḍakena rassadaṇḍakaṃ paharaṇakīḷanaṃ. Salākahatthanti lākhāya vā mañjiṭṭhikāya vā piṭṭhodakena vā salākahatthaṃ temetvā – ‘‘kiṃ hotū’’ti bhūmiyaṃ vā bhittiyaṃ vā taṃ paharitvā hatthiassādirūpadassanakīḷanaṃ. Akkhanti guḷakīḷā. Paṅgacīraṃ vuccati paṇṇanāḷikaṃ, taṃ dhamantā kīḷanti. Vaṅkakanti gāmadārakānaṃ kīḷanakaṃ khuddakanaṅgalaṃ. Mokkhacikā vuccati samparivattanakīḷā, ākāse vā daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhupariyabhāvena parivattanakīḷāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ciṅgulikaṃ vuccati tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamanacakkaṃ. Pattāḷhakaṃ vuccati paṇṇanāḷikā. Tāya vālukādīni minantā kīḷanti. Rathakanti khuddakarathaṃ. Dhanukanti khuddakadhanumeva. Akkharikā vuccati ākāse vā piṭṭhiyaṃ vā akkharajānanakīḷā. Manesikā nāma manasā cintitajānanakīḷā. Yathāvajjaṃ nāma kāṇakuṇikhujjādīnaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vajjaṃ, taṃ taṃ payojetvā dassanakīḷā.
15 「高床」:指尺寸超标的床座。而「持续地沉溺于」是相对此而言,故在所有分句中皆用受格。「长凳」:指脚部雕刻有猛兽形象的凳子。「毛毯」:指长毛的大毯子,据说其毛长超过四指宽。「彩绘毯」:指用杂色羊毛织成的铺敷物。「白毯」:指纯白羊毛编织的铺敷物。「花毯」:指有厚实花纹的羊毛铺敷物,亦名「余甘子叶」。「棉垫」:指用三种棉花中任意一种填充而成的垫子。「兽纹毯」:指装饰有狮子、老虎等图案的羊毛铺敷物。「双面毛毯」:指两面都有毛的羊毛铺敷物,有人说这是「一面有凸起花纹」的意思。「单面毛毯」:指只有一面有毛的羊毛铺敷物,有人说这是「两面有凸起花纹」的意思。「绣锦」:指用珠宝镶边缝制的丝绣锦铺敷物。「丝毯」:指同样用珠宝镶边缝制的丝线织成铺敷物。然而,《律藏》中提到,纯粹的丝绸是允许的。但《长部注》中则说:「除了棉垫之外,上述所有毛毯等物,一旦用珠宝镶嵌了,便成为不适宜的了。」显示巴利原文
15.Āsandinti pamāṇātikkantāsanaṃ. Anuyuttā viharantīti idaṃ apekkhitvā pana sabbapadesu upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Pallaṅkoti pādesu vāḷarūpāni ṭhapetvā kato. Gonakoti dīghalomako mahākojavo, caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni. Cittakanti vānavicittaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Paṭikāti uṇṇāmayo setattharaṇo. Paṭalikāti ghanapupphako uṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Yo āmalakapattotipi vuccati. Tūlikāti tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatarapuṇṇā tūlikā. Vikatikāti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Uddalomīti ubhayatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ, keci ‘‘ekatouggatapuppha’’nti vadanti. Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Keci ‘‘ubhatouggatapuppha’’nti vadanti. Kaṭṭissanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyakaṭṭissamayapaccattharaṇaṃ. Koseyyanti ratanaparisibbitameva kosiyasuttamayapaccattharaṇaṃ. Suddhakoseyyaṃ pana vaṭṭatīti vinaye vuttaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni na vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
「裁剪毯」:指供十六位舞女站立舞蹈所用的羊毛铺敷物。「手敷物」和「马敷物」:即铺在象背和马背上的敷物;车敷物也是同理。「羚羊皮毡」:指用羚羊皮按床的尺寸缝制而成的毡毯。「迦达利鹿皮最上敷物」:指有一种名为迦达利鹿的皮,以此做成的最上敷物,意即最上等的敷物。据说那是在白布上面铺上迦达利鹿皮后缝制而成的。「带顶帐」:指带有上帷帐,即上方系有红色天帐的意思。若下方有不允许的铺敷物,即使上面设的是白色天帐,也是不允许的;若下方没有,则是可以的。「两端有红枕」:指床头枕和床脚枕,即床的两端有红色的枕头,这是不被允许的。然而,如果只是一个枕头,两端是红色,或者呈现莲花色,或是杂色的,只要尺寸符合规定,是允许的。但是,过大的枕头是被禁止的。不是红色的两个枕头都是允许使用的。如果得到多余的,应当施舍给他人。如果无法施舍,则可以将其横铺在床中间,在上面再铺上一层铺敷物后躺卧,这也是允许的。对于长椅等,也应当依照所述的方法来处理。确实这样说过:「诸位比丘,我允许你们将长椅的腿砍掉后使用,将长凳的猛兽装饰破」显示巴利原文
Kuttakanti soḷasannaṃ nāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccanayoggaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Hatthattharaṃ assattharanti hatthiassapiṭṭhīsu attharaṇaattharakāyeva. Rathattharepi eseva nayo. Ajinappaveṇīti ajinacammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇī. Kadalīmigapavarapaccattharaṇanti kadalīmigacammaṃ nāma atthi, tena kataṃ pavarapaccattharaṇaṃ; uttamapaccattharaṇanti attho. Taṃ kira setavatthassa upari kadalīmigacammaṃ pattharitvā sibbetvā karonti. Sauttaracchadanti saha uttaracchadena, uparibaddhena rattavitānena saddhinti attho. Setavitānampi heṭṭhā akappiyapaccattharaṇe sati na vaṭṭati, asati pana vaṭṭati. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānanti sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti mañcassa ubhatolohitakaṃ upadhānaṃ, etaṃ na kappati. Yaṃ pana ekameva upadhānaṃ ubhosu passesu rattaṃ vā hoti padumavaṇṇaṃ vā vicitraṃ vā, sace pamāṇayuttaṃ, vaṭṭati. Mahāupadhānaṃ pana paṭikkhittaṃ. Alohitakāni dvepi vaṭṭantiyeva. Tato uttari labhitvā aññesaṃ dātabbāni. Dātuṃ asakkonto mañce tiriyaṃ attharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjitumpi labhati. Āsandīādīsu pana vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āsandiyā pāde chinditvā paribhuñjituṃ, pallaṅkassa vāḷe bhinditvā paribhuñjituṃ, tūlikaṃ vijaṭetvā bimbohanaṃ kātuṃ, avasesaṃ bhummattharaṇaṃ kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 297).
16 关于涂擦等:刚从母胎出生的孩子,身体的气味要到十二岁时才会消失。为了去除他们身体的恶臭,有人会用香粉等为他们涂擦。像这种性质的涂擦是不允许的。然而,对于有福德的男孩,若是让他俯卧在大腿上,用油为他涂摩,并按摩他的手、脚、大腿、肚脐等处,意在使其体型端正,像这种性质的按摩也是不被允许的。显示巴利原文
16. Ucchādanādīsu mātukucchito nikkhantadārakānaṃ sarīragandho dvādasavassapattakāle nassati, tesaṃ sarīraduggandhaharaṇatthāya gandhacuṇṇādīhi ucchādenti, evarūpaṃ ucchādanaṃ na vaṭṭati. Puññavante pana dārake ūrūsu nipajjāpetvā telena makkhetvā hatthapādaūrunābhiādīnaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ parimaddanti, evarūpaṃ parimaddanaṃ na vaṭṭati.
「沐浴」:是指用香料等为那些孩子洗浴。「捶锻」:是指如同对待大力士一般,用木槌等敲打他们的手脚,以增长臂力。「镜」:是指任何种类的镜子都不可持有。「涂眼彩」:是指作为装饰的眼部涂彩。「花鬘」:无论是编结成环的花鬘,还是散花。「涂香」:是指一切令肤色改变的涂香。为去除面部黑斑等而涂抹泥浆;当血气紊乱时,涂抹芥子浆;病气耗损时,涂抹芝麻浆;血气平息时,涂抹姜黄浆;待肤色恢复正常后,以面粉末擦脸。凡此种种,皆不被允许。显示巴利原文
Nhāpananti tesaṃyeva dārakānaṃ gandhādīhi nhāpanaṃ. Sambāhananti mahāmallānaṃ viya hatthapāde muggarādīhi paharitvā bāhuvaḍḍhanaṃ. Ādāsanti yaṃ kiñci ādāsaṃ pariharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Añjananti alaṅkārañjanameva. Mālāti baddhamālā vā abaddhamālā vā. Vilepananti yaṃ kiñci chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Mukhacuṇṇaṃ mukhalepananti mukhe kāḷapīḷakādīnaṃ haraṇatthāya mattikakakkaṃ denti, tena lohite calite sāsapakakkaṃ denti, tena dose khādite tilakakkaṃ denti, tena lohite sannisinne haliddikakkaṃ denti, tena chavivaṇṇe ārūḷhe mukhacuṇṇakena mukhaṃ cuṇṇenti, taṃ sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati.
关于手饰等。有人在手上系结各种彩色的螺贝等饰物游走。诸如此类,乃至一切手部装饰,皆不被允许。另有人结起顶髻游走,并以金缕布、珍珠串等将其缠绕:凡此一切,皆不被允许。另有人手持四肘长杖,或其他种种装饰之杖而游走;亦有人在身体左侧挂一个外表华丽、绘有男女等图样的药筒;有人佩戴一柄镶嵌耳饰宝石、极其锋利的剑;有人撑着以五色线缝制、并缀有鳄鱼牙齿等饰物的伞;有人穿着以金银杂色装饰、并嵌有孔雀尾羽等的鞋子;又有一些人,在额前留出约宝石般长短、宽四指的发际线,显露于外,并在额上系一条犹如乌云中闪电般的王冠饰带,他们佩戴顶髻宝珠,手持以拂尘尾做成的扇子。凡此一切,皆不被允许。显示巴利原文
Hatthabandhādīsu hatthe vicitrasaṅkhakapālādīni bandhitvā vicaranti, taṃ vā aññaṃ vā sabbampi hatthābharaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati, apare sikhaṃ bandhitvā vicaranti. Suvaṇṇacīrakamuttalatādīhi ca taṃ parikkhipanti; taṃ sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati. Apare catuhatthadaṇḍaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana alaṅkatadaṇḍakaṃ gahetvā vicaranti, tathā itthipurisarūpādivicittaṃ bhesajjanāḷikaṃ suparikkhittaṃ vāmapasse olaggitaṃ; apare kaṇṇikaratanaparikkhittakosaṃ atitikhiṇaṃ asiṃ, pañcavaṇṇasuttasibbitaṃ makaradantakādivicittaṃ chattaṃ, suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrā morapiñchādiparikkhittā upāhanā, keci ratanamattāyāmaṃ caturaṅgulavitthataṃ kesantaparicchedaṃ dassetvā meghamukhe vijjulataṃ viya nalāṭe uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ bandhanti, cūḷāmaṇiṃ dhārenti, cāmaravālabījaniṃ dhārenti, taṃ sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati.
17 由于不能导向天界与解脱之道,属于畜生的谈论方式,故称「畜生论」。其中,针对国王而展开的谈论,如说“摩诃三摩多王、曼陀多王、法阿育王有如此广大的威神力”等,称为「国王论」。对于盗贼论等,亦复如是。在这些谈论中,若论及“某某国王容貌端严、令人乐见”等,随顺世俗爱欲而说,即属畜生论。然而,若说“纵有如此大威神力,也终究归于灭去”,如此阐发的言谈,便处于禅修业处的范畴。关于盗贼,若谈论“根本天具如此大威神力,雨云鬟具如此大威神力”等内容,并对其事迹赞叹道:“啊,真英勇!”,此种随顺世俗爱欲的言说,即为畜生论。关于战争,例如在谈论婆罗多大战等时,说“某人如此被杀,某人如此被击败”,仅凭这种追逐欲乐的言说方式,即为畜生论。然而,若说“连那些人也终归灭去”,像这样不论在何处展开的言说,就都能成为禅修的业处。此外,关于食物等,若以追逐欲乐的心态描述:“我们曾享用过如此色泽好、香气好、味道好、触感妙好的东西”,这是不被允许的。但若能赋予其意义……显示巴利原文
17. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā kathāti tiracchānakathā. Tattha rājānaṃ ārabbha mahāsammato mandhātā dhammāsoko evaṃ mahānubhāvotiādinā nayena pavattā kathā rājakathā. Esa nayo corakathādīsu. Tesu asuko rājā abhirūpo dassanīyotiādinā nayena gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā hoti. Sopi nāma evaṃ mahānubhāvo khayaṃ gatoti evaṃ pavattā pana kammaṭṭhānabhāve tiṭṭhati. Coresu mūladevo evaṃ mahānubhāvo, meghamālo evaṃ mahānubhāvoti tesaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca aho sūrāti gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā. Yuddhepi bhāratayuddhādīsu asukena asuko evaṃ mārito, evaṃ viddhoti kāmassādavaseneva kathā tiracchānakathā. Tepi nāma khayaṃ gatāti evaṃ pavattā pana sabbattha kammaṭṭhānameva hoti. Api ca annādīsu evaṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ gandhavantaṃ rasavantaṃ phassasampannaṃ khādimha bhuñjimhāti kāmassādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sātthakaṃ pana katvā pubbe evaṃ vaṇṇādisampannaṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ sayanaṃ mālaṃ gandhaṃ sīlavantānaṃ adamha, cetiye pūjaṃ karimhāti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ñātikathādīsu pana ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā sūrā samatthā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evaṃ vicitrehi yānehi vicarimhā’’ti vā assādavasena vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘tepi no ñātakā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evarūpā upāhanā saṅghassa adamhā’’ti vā kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Gāmakathāpi suniviṭṭhadunniviṭṭhasubhikkhadubbhikkhādivasena vā ‘‘asukagāmavāsino sūrā samatthā’’ti vā evaṃ assādavasena na vaṭṭati. Sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti vā ‘‘khayavayaṃ gatā’’ti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nigamanagarajanapadakathādīsupi eseva nayo.
关于妇女论,若涉及容貌、体态等,出于随顺喜乐而谈论,是不被允许的;若说“她们具足信心、净信,已归于灭尽”,如此则是允许的。关于英雄论,若随顺喜乐地说“那位名叫欢喜友的战士,真英勇啊”,是不被允许的;若说“他具足信心,已归于灭尽”,如此则是允许的。关于街道论,若随顺喜乐地说“某某街道,布局齐整或凌乱,居民英勇能干”,是不被允许的;若说“他们具足信心、净信,已归于灭尽”,如此则是允许的。显示巴利原文
Itthikathāpi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīni paṭicca assādavasena na vaṭṭati, saddhā pasannā khayavayaṃ gatāti evameva vaṭṭati. Sūrakathāpi ‘nandimitto nāma yodho sūro ahosī’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati. Saddho ahosi khayaṃ gatoti evameva vaṭṭati. Visikhākathāpi ‘‘asukā visikhā suniviṭṭhā dunniviṭṭhā sūrā samatthā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati. Saddhā pasannā khayavayaṃ gatāti evameva vaṭṭati.
“瓶处论”是指谈论取水处的言论,亦称为谈论水渡津,或指谈论取水女奴的言论。若以“她们美丽动人、能歌善舞”等语随顺喜乐而谈论,则不许可;唯以“具足信心、具足净信”等方式说明,方为许可。“已故亡者论”是指谈论已故的亲属。对此,其判定方式与谈论在世亲属相同。显示巴利原文
Kumbhaṭṭhānakathāti udakaṭṭhānakathā, udakatitthakathātipi vuccati, kumbhadāsikathā vā, sāpi ‘‘pāsādikā naccituṃ gāyituṃ chekā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati; saddhā pasannātiādinā nayeneva vaṭṭati. Pubbapetakathāti atītañātikathā. Tattha vattamānañātikathāsadiso vinicchayo.
“杂论”是指除前后所说之外,其余种种性质不同、毫无意义的谈论。“世间传说”是指如“这个世界是谁创造的?是某某创造的。乌鸦是白色的,因为骨头是白色的;鹤是红色的,因为血是红色的”等一类的顺世外道诡辩言论。显示巴利原文
Nānattakathāti purimapacchimakathāhi vimuttā avasesā nānāsabhāvā niratthakakathā. Lokakkhāyikāti ayaṃ loko kena nimmito, asukena nāma nimmito. Kāko seto, aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā; balākā rattā. Lohitassa rattattāti evamādikā lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā.
「大海传说」:例如谈论“大海为何名为沙伽罗?因为由沙伽罗天王所掘,所以称为沙伽罗;又因用手印自表‘为我所掘’,故称为海”等这类毫无意义的大海传说。「有无论」:即提出“如此则有增长,如此则有减损”之类任何无意义的理由而展开的谈论。显示巴利原文
Samuddakkhāyikā nāma kasmā samuddo sāgaro? Sāgaradevena khato, tasmā sāgaro. Khato meti hatthamuddāya sayaṃ niveditattā ‘‘samuddo’’ti evamādikā niratthakā samuddakkhāyanakathā. Bhavoti vuḍḍhi. Abhavoti hāni. Iti bhavo, iti abhavoti yaṃ vā taṃ vā niratthakakāraṇaṃ vatvā pavattitakathā itibhavābhavakathā.
18 「诤论」即争执性的谈论,带着瞋怒的谈论。在其中,有人说:“我的言论是‘有准备的’”,意即我的言论准备充分、流畅、义理连贯、有理有据。“你的言论是‘没准备的’”,意即你的言论没有准备、不通顺。“你长久熟习的已被我一句话推翻”,意即你长时惯习而精通的东西,被我一语彻底颠覆,你一无所知。显示巴利原文
18.Viggāhikakathāti viggahakathā, sārambhakathā. Tattha sahitaṃ meti mayhaṃ vacanaṃ sahitaṃ siliṭṭhaṃ atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttanti attho. Asahitaṃ teti tuyhaṃ vacanaṃ asahitaṃ asiliṭṭhaṃ. Adhiciṇṇaṃ te viparāvattanti yaṃ tuyhaṃ dīgharattāciṇṇavasena suppaguṇaṃ, taṃ mayhaṃ ekavacaneneva viparāvattaṃ parivattitvā ṭhitaṃ, na kiñci jānāsīti attho.
「Āropito te vādo」意为:我已指出了你的过失。「Cara vādappamokkhāya」意为:为脱离过失而四处游历学习,也就是到各处修学。「Nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosi」意为:你若有些许能力,现在便来辩驳。显示巴利原文
Āropitote vādoti mayā tava doso āropito. Cara vādappamokkhāyāti dosamocanatthaṃ cara, vicara; tattha tattha gantvā sikkhāti attho. Nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti atha sayaṃ pahosi, idānimeva nibbeṭhehīti.
19 信使之论中:“从这里去某处”意为“从这儿去往某个地方”。“从那里来这里”意为“从某个地方来到这儿”。“拿这个去”意为“把这东西拿去那里”。“从那里拿这个来”意为“从某处把这东西拿来这里”。简而言之,除了为五种同法者、为与三宝利益相关之事,以及为在家人作教示而传递信息之外,对其他的人做这种事是不合适的。显示巴利原文
19. Dūteyyakathāyaṃ idha gacchāti ito asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gaccha. Amutrāgacchāti tato asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ āgaccha. Idaṃ harāti ito idaṃ nāma hara. Amutra idaṃ āharāti asukaṭṭhānato idaṃ nāma idha āhara. Saṅkhepato pana idaṃ dūteyyaṃ nāma ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike ratanattayassa upakārapaṭisaṃyuttañca gihīsāsanaṃ aññesaṃ na vaṭṭati.
20 所谓“诡诈者”等,是指以三种诡诈的事相欺诳世人、令其惊异,故称诡诈者。为了利养恭敬而说话者,称为“饶舌者”。以占相为戒者,即是“占相者”。以压迫为戒者,即是“压迫者”。以利养追求利养,不断寻觅、四处寻求者,称为“以利求利者”。诡诈、饶舌、占相、压迫、以利求利,这些是具足此类行为者的别称。此处仅为略说。详细来说,这些诡诈等内容,已在《清净道论》的戒释中,援引原典与注释放加以说明了。显示巴利原文
20.Kuhakātiādīsu tividhena kuhanavatthunā lokaṃ kuhayanti, vimhāpayantīti kuhakā. Lābhasakkāratthikā hutvā lapantīti lapakā. Nimittaṃ sīlametesanti nemittikā. Nippeso sīlametesanti nippesikā. Lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanti magganti pariyesanttīti lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsitāro. Kuhanā, lapanā, nemittikatā, nippesikatā, lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatāti etāhi samannāgatānaṃ puggalānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena panetā kuhanādikā visuddhimagge sīlaniddeseyeva pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca āharitvā pakāsitāti.
大戒的注释显示巴利原文
Mahāsīlavaṇṇanā
21 此后是大戒。“肢体”指手足等部位,通过观察这些肢体特征,预知此人是否长寿、有名望等,这种方法称为肢体明。“相”指相明。据说盘荼王曾将三颗珍珠攥在拳头里,问占相者:“我手里有什么?”占相者四下张望,恰巧看见壁虎捕住一只苍蝇,便说:“珍珠。”又问:“几颗?”听到公鸡连啼三声,便答:“三颗。”诸如此类,他们便这样靠着修习相术度日。显示巴利原文
21. Ito paraṃ mahāsīlaṃ hoti. Aṅganti hatthapādādīsu yena kenaci evarūpena aṅgena samannāgato dīghāyu yasavā hotītiādinayappavattaṃ aṅgasatthaṃ. Nimittanti nimittasatthaṃ. Paṇḍurājā kira tisso muttāyo muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā nemittikaṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ me hatthe’’ti? So ito cito ca vilokesi, tasmiñca samaye gharagolikāya makkhikā gayhantī muttā, so ‘‘muttā’’ti āha. Puna ‘‘katī’’ti puṭṭho kukkuṭassa tikkhattuṃ ravantassa saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘tisso’’ti āha. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ ādisitvā nimittamanuyuttā viharanti.
「灾异」指雷击等大灾变,见到之后便预言“这将会发生,会那样发生”。“梦”指若有人在午前做梦,便会得到某种果报;若梦见某某,便将得到某某等,他们依这些方法修习梦术而过活。「相」指具有这种相貌特征的是国王,有那种相貌特征的是副王等。「鼠啮」指被老鼠咬坏之物,凭借它,无论未裁剪还是已裁剪好的衣服,若被如此咬坏,便预示会发生某某事情。「火供」指用某种木头以某种方式祭祀,就会发生某某事情,这就是祭火。勺供等也属于火供,但依“用这样的勺子,配合这样的谷糠等来祭祀,就会发生某某事情”的规则,才分开来叙述。显示巴利原文
Uppātanti asanipātādīnaṃ mahantānaṃ uppatitaṃ, tañhi disvā ‘‘idaṃ bhavissati, evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti ādisanti. Supinanti yo pubbaṇhasamaye supinaṃ passati, evaṃ vipāko hoti; yo idaṃ nāma passati, tassa idaṃ nāma hotītiādinā nayena supinakaṃ anuyuttā viharanti. Lakkhaṇanti iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgato rājā hoti, iminā uparājātiādikaṃ. Mūsikacchinnanti undūrakhāyitaṃ. Tenāpi hi ahate vā vatthe anahate vā vatthe ito paṭṭhāya evaṃ chinne idaṃ nāma hotīti ādisanti. Aggihomanti evarūpena dārunā evaṃ hute idaṃ nāma hotīti aggijuhanaṃ. Dabbihomādīnipi aggihomāneva, evarūpāya dabbiyā īdisehi kaṇādīhi hute idaṃ nāma hotīti evaṃ pavattivasena pana visuṃ vuttāni.
其中,「糠」指米糠。「米」指稻谷等以及各种草类的籽实。「酥油」指牛酥油等。「油」指芝麻油等。把芥子等含在口中投入火里,或者念诵完咒术后再献祭,就叫「口供」。用右腋窝的血、膝盖的血等来献祭,就叫「血供」。「肢明」:前文中仅凭观察肢体预言,故称肢明;此处则是观察指骨之后,念诵咒术,再来判断“这人是良家子弟或者不是”、“具足祥瑞或者不具足”等,这即是肢明。「宅相明」是审察宅地、园地等好坏的明。即便是观察泥土等不同情况,念诵咒术后,也能看到地下约三十拉他那深,以及空中约八十拉他那范围内地方的好坏。「刹帝利明」指象术、马术、剑术、王法论等学问。「尸林明」指进入冢间后修习取子棋的那种明,也有人称它为豺声明。「鬼明」指驱鬼治病的咒语。「地明」指住在地居者那里才能学到的咒语。「蛇明」既是治疗蛇咬伤的医术,也是召请蛇的咒术。「毒明」指的是能防护陈旧毒、制造新毒,或者单纯用于对付毒害的那些术。「蝎明」是治疗蝎子螫伤的医术。鼠明也是同理。「鸟明」是根据一切有翅膀与无翅膀、两足与四足等鸟兽的鸣叫声所得来的智慧总称。显示巴利原文
Tattha kaṇoti kuṇḍako. Taṇḍulāti sāliādīnañceva tiṇajātīnañca taṇḍulā. Sappīti gosappiādikaṃ. Telanti tilatelādikaṃ. Sāsapādīni pana mukhena gahetvā aggimhi pakkhipanaṃ, vijjaṃ parijappitvā juhanaṃ vā mukhahomaṃ. Dakkhiṇakkhakajaṇṇulohitādīhi juhanaṃ lohitahomaṃ. Aṅgavijjāti pubbe aṅgameva disvā byākaraṇavasena aṅgaṃ vuttaṃ, idha aṅgulaṭṭhiṃ disvā vijjaṃ parijappitvā ayaṃ kulaputto vā no vā, sirīsampanno vā no vātiādibyākaraṇavasena aṅgavijjā vuttā. Vatthuvijjāti gharavatthuārāmavatthādīnaṃ guṇadosasallakkhaṇavijjā. Mattikādivisesaṃ disvāpi hi vijjaṃ parijappitvā heṭṭhā pathaviyaṃ tiṃsaratanamatte, ākāse ca asītiratanamatte padese guṇadosaṃ passanti. Khattavijjāti abbheyyamāsurakkharājasatthādisatthaṃ. Sivavijjāti susāne pavisitvā santikaraṇavijjā, siṅgālarutavijjātipi vadanti. Bhūtavijjāti bhūtavejjamanto. Bhūrivijjāti bhūrighare vasantena uggahetabbamanto. Ahivijjāti sappadaṭṭhatikicchanavijjā ceva sappāvhāyanavijjā ca. Visavijjāti yāya, purāṇavisaṃ vā rakkhanti, navavisaṃ vā karonti visavantameva vā. Vicchikavijjāti vicchikadaṭṭhatikicchanavijjā. Mūsikavijjāyapi eseva nayo. Sakuṇavijjāti sapakkhakaapakkhakadvipadacatuppadānaṃ rutagatādivasena sakuṇañāṇaṃ. Vāyasavijjāti kākarutañāṇaṃ, taṃ visuññeva satthaṃ, tasmā visuṃ vuttaṃ.
「熟思」指成熟的思维。此处意谓像“这个人能活这么久,那个人能活这么久”这样生起的预言智。「箭护」指护箭法,即令箭射不到自己身上的术法。「兽眼」是总括的说法,指依据一切鸟类和四足兽的鸣叫声所得来的智慧。显示巴利原文
Pakkajjhānanti paripākagatacintā. Idāni ‘‘ayaṃ ettakaṃ jīvissati, ayaṃ ettaka’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ ādiṭṭhañāṇanti attho. Saraparittāṇanti sararakkhaṇaṃ, yathā attano upari na āgacchati, evaṃ karaṇavijjā. Migacakkanti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ sabbasakuṇacatuppadānaṃ rutañāṇavasena vuttaṃ.
22 在「珠宝相」等之中,这样的珠宝是好的,那样的珠宝是不好的,它能为物主带来健康、权势等利益,或者不能。意思是,他们就这样根据颜色、形状等特征,以修习珠宝相等相术而住。其中的「武器」,是指除刀剑等之外的其余武器。女相等,也应当依据他们所居住家庭的兴衰来理解。而在羊相等中,应知这样的羊等之肉可食,那样的则不可食,这是它们的差别。显示巴利原文
22.Maṇilakkhaṇādīsu evarūpo maṇi pasattho, evarūpo apasattho, sāmino ārogyaissariyādīnaṃ hetu hoti, na hotīti, evaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena maṇiādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ anuyuttā viharantīti attho. Tattha āvudhanti ṭhapetvā asiādīni avasesaṃ āvudhaṃ. Itthilakkhaṇādīnipi yamhi kule te itthipurisādayo vasanti, tassa vuḍḍhihānivaseneva veditabbāni. Ajalakkhaṇādīsu pana evarūpānaṃ ajādīnaṃ maṃsaṃ khāditabbaṃ, evarūpānaṃ na khāditabbanti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo.
在此,蜥蜴相方面,于绘画和装饰品等处,若有如是之蜥蜴,便会预示某事,这是应知的差别。此处有一则故事:据说在某一寺院中,有人于壁画上画了一只正在吹火的蜥蜴。从此以后,比丘们之间便生起了极大的争执。一位客比丘看见后,便将那蜥蜴抹去。自此,争执便平息了。椽端相应从用作装饰的椽端和屋舍的椽端这两方面来了解。龟相与蜥蜴相类似。动物相则是总括性的,是依据所有四足动物的相来解说的。显示巴利原文
Api cettha godhāya lakkhaṇe cittakammapiḷandhanādīsupi evarūpāya godhāya sati idaṃ nāma hotīti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo. Idañcettha vatthu – ekasmiṃ kira vihāre cittakamme godhaṃ aggiṃ dhamamānaṃ akaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ mahāvivādo jāto. Eko āgantukabhikkhu taṃ disvā makkhesi. Tato paṭṭhāya vivādo mandībhūto hoti. Kaṇṇikalakkhaṇaṃ piḷandhanakaṇṇikāyapi gehakaṇṇikāyapi vasena veditabbaṃ. Kacchapalakkhaṇaṃ godhālakkhaṇasadisameva. Migalakkhaṇaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ sabbacatuppadānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ.
23 「国王们将出发」是指:在某日、某星宿之时,某某国王将要外出——如此预言国王们的远行。此理适用于一切处。唯此处有一特点:「不出发」是指已外出之人再度归来。「内部国王将前进,外部国王将退却」是说:都城之内的我方国王将前往迎战外来国王,而后那位外来国王便会退却——如此预言国王们的前进与后退。第二句亦同此理。至于胜利与失败,其义自明。显示巴利原文
23.Raññaṃ niyyānaṃ bhavissatīti asukadivase asukanakkhattena asukassa nāma rañño niggamanaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ rājūnaṃ pavāsagamanaṃ byākaroti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kevalaṃ panettha aniyyānanti vippavutthānaṃ puna āgamanaṃ. Abbhantarānaṃ raññaṃ upayānaṃ bhavissati, bāhirānaṃ raññaṃ apayānanti antonagare amhākaṃ rājā paṭiviruddhaṃ bahirājānaṃ upasaṅkamissati, tato tassa paṭikkamanaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ raññaṃ upayānāpayānaṃ byākaroti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Jayaparājayā pākaṭāyeva.
24 「月食等」:指通过预言“于某日,罗睺将抓取月亮”而了知。又,星宿与火星等的交会发生抓取,亦称为星食。「流星」:指火光从天空坠落。「天空燃烧」:指天空昏暗,犹如被火焰、烟焰等扰乱。「天鸣」:指干云之轰鸣。「上升」:指升起。「下沉」:指沉没。「染污」:指不清净。「清净」:指洁净。「如是果报」:指世间由此而有种种苦乐之果报。显示巴利原文
24.Candaggāhādayo asukadivase rāhu candaṃ gahessatīti byākaraṇavaseneva veditabbā. Api ca nakkhattassa aṅgārakādigāhasamāyogopi nakkhattagāhoyeva. Ukkāpātoti ākāsato ukkānaṃ patanaṃ. Disāḍāhoti disākālusiyaṃ aggisikhadhūmasikhādīhi ākulabhāvo viya. Devadudrabhīti sukkhavalāhakagajjanaṃ. Uggamananti udayanaṃ. Okkamananti atthaṅgamanaṃ. Saṃkilesanti avisuddhatā. Vodānanti visuddhatā. Evaṃ vipākoti lokassa evaṃ vividhasukhadukkhāvaho.
25 「好雨」:指天降适时而持续的雨水。「坏雨」:指不降雨,即雨受阻。「手印」:指手之印相。「计算」:指准确无误的计算。「数」:指通过合计、作百等所得之总数。对此熟练者,即便见到一棵树,也能知晓“此树有多少叶子”。「诗歌」:世尊曾言:“比丘们,有四种诗人。何等为四?思诗人、闻诗人、义诗人、辩才诗人。”此四种诗人,或依自己思惟而作;或依所闻而作,如听闻“昔日有毘山多罗王”等;或依义而作:“此是其义,我当如此连缀”;或依处所显现的辩才而作:“见某物后,我将创作与之相似者”——如是,为谋生而作诗。「顺世论」:如前所说。显示巴利原文
25.Suvuṭṭhikāti devassa sammādhārānuppavecchanaṃ. Dubbuṭṭhikāti avaggāho, vassavibandhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Muddāti hatthamuddā. Gaṇanā vuccati acchiddakagaṇanā. Saṅkhānanti saṅkalanasaṭuppādanādivasena piṇḍagaṇanā. Yassa sā paguṇā hoti, so rukkhampi disvā ettakāni ettha paṇṇānīti jānāti. Kāveyyanti ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, kavī. Katame cattāro? Cintākavi, sutakavi, atthakavi, paṭibhānakavī’’ti (a. ni. 4.231). Imesaṃ catunnaṃ kavīnaṃ attano cintāvasena vā; ‘‘vessantaro nāma rājā ahosī’’tiādīni sutvā sutavasena vā; imassa ayaṃ attho, evaṃ taṃ yojessāmīti evaṃ atthavasena vā; kiñcideva disvā tappaṭibhāgaṃ kattabbaṃ karissāmīti evaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānavasena vā; jīvikatthāya kabyakaraṇaṃ. Lokāyataṃ vuttameva.
26 「迎娶」:指依某星宿,从某家族为此童子迎娶一童女。「出嫁」:指依某星宿,将此童女许配某童子,并言“如此她将繁荣”。「和合」:指作和合仪轨,说:“今日星宿好,今日当和合,如是汝等不相离。”「分离」:指作分离仪轨,说:“若汝等欲分离,今日便分离,如是汝等不复合。”「敛财」:指催索财富,说:“今日去收取已给之财或债,今日所取者将安稳。”「散财」:指运用财富,说:“若欲以投资或放贷等运用财富,今日所运用者当得二倍、四倍。”「作吉祥」:指行令人喜爱之事,或作具足荣光之事。「作不吉祥」:指与此相反。「作死胎」:指为已受对抗、已衰弱、不稳固、已死之胎儿作治疗,意为为令其不再毁坏而施药。胎儿因风、因虫、因业三种因缘而毁坏。于中,因风毁坏者,施予凉性清凉之药;因虫毁坏者,对治其虫;因业毁坏者,连佛陀亦无法挽救。显示巴利原文
26.Āvāhanaṃ nāma imassa dārakassa asukakulato asukanakkhattena dārikaṃ ānethāti āvāhakaraṇaṃ. Vivāhananti imaṃ dārikaṃ asukassa nāma dārakassa asukanakkhattena detha, evamassā vuḍḍhi bhavissatīti vivāhakaraṇaṃ. Saṃvaraṇanti saṃvaraṇaṃ nāma ‘ajja nakkhattaṃ sundaraṃ, ajjeva samaggā hotha, iti vo viyogo na bhavissatī’ti evaṃ samaggakaraṇaṃ. Vivaraṇaṃ nāma ‘sace viyujjitukāmattha, ajjeva viyujjatha , iti vo puna saṃyogo na bhavissatī’ti evaṃ visaṃyogakaraṇaṃ. Saṅkiraṇanti ‘uṭṭhānaṃ vā iṇaṃ vā dinnaṃ dhanaṃ ajja saṅkaḍḍhatha, ajja saṅkaḍḍhitañhi taṃ thāvaraṃ hotī’ti evaṃ dhanapiṇḍāpanaṃ. Vikiraṇanti ‘sace payogauddhārādivasena dhanaṃ payojitukāmattha, ajja payojitaṃ diguṇacatugguṇaṃ hotī’ti evaṃ dhanapayojāpanaṃ. Subhagakaraṇanti piyamanāpakaraṇaṃ vā sassirīkakaraṇaṃ vā. Dubbhagakaraṇanti tabbiparītaṃ. Viruddhagabbhakaraṇanti viruddhassa vilīnassa aṭṭhitassa matassa gabbhassa karaṇaṃ. Puna avināsāya bhesajjadānanti attho. Gabbho hi vātena, pāṇakehi, kammunā cāti tīhi kāraṇehi vinassati. Tattha vātena vinassante nibbāpanīyaṃ sītalaṃ bhesajjaṃ deti, pāṇakehi vinassante pāṇakānaṃ paṭikammaṃ karoti, kammunā vinassante pana buddhāpi paṭibāhituṃ na sakkonti.
「舌缚」:以明咒束缚舌头。「颚缚」:以口缚咒束缚颚骨,令其无法活动。「手咒」:为令手翻转而念的明咒。据说,念此咒者站在七步之外,对方便会翻手抛出。「耳咒」:为使耳不能闻而念的明咒。据说,念此咒后,在裁判处说话,对手听而不闻,无法作答。「镜问」:于镜中召请天神而问。「童女问」:于童女身上召请天神而问。「天问」:于女仆身上召请天神而问。「侍奉太阳」:为了谋生而侍奉太阳。「侍奉大天」:同样,为了谋生而侍奉大梵天。「喷焰」:以明咒从口中喷出火焰。「迎请吉祥天」:以“来吧,吉祥天,安住于我头上”之语,以头迎请吉祥天。显示巴利原文
Jivhānibandhananti mantena jivhāya bandhakaraṇaṃ. Hanusaṃhanananti mukhabandhamantena yathā hanukaṃ cāletuṃ na sakkonti, evaṃ bandhakaraṇaṃ. Hatthābhijappananti hatthānaṃ parivattanatthaṃ mantajappanaṃ. Tasmiṃ kira mante sattapadantare ṭhatvā jappite itaro hatthe parivattetvā khipati. Kaṇṇajappananti kaṇṇehi saddaṃ assavanatthāya vijjāya jappanaṃ. Taṃ kira jappitvā vinicchayaṭṭhāne yaṃ icchati, taṃ bhaṇati, paccatthiko taṃ na suṇāti, tato paṭivacanaṃ sampādetuṃ na sakkoti. Ādāsapañhanti ādāse devataṃ otāretvā pañhapucchanaṃ. Kumārikapañhanti kumārikāya sarīre devataṃ otāretvā pañhapucchanaṃ. Devapañhanti dāsiyā sarīre devataṃ otāretvā pañhapucchanaṃ. Ādiccupaṭṭhānanti jīvikatthāya ādiccapāricariyā. Mahatupaṭṭhānanti tatheva mahābrahmapāricariyā. Abbhujjalananti mantena mukhato aggijālānīharaṇaṃ. Sirivhāyananti ‘‘ehi siri, mayhaṃ sire patiṭṭhāhī’’ti evaṃ sirena siriyā avhāyanaṃ.
27 「安抚业」:前往天神处,承诺说:“若我此事成就,我将以这些供养你们。”这是事成时应作的承诺之业。当事成后履行它,则称为「誓愿业」。「地屋业」:住于地屋后,运用所持的明咒。「男术」与「黄门术」:此处,男指男人,黄门指黄门。将黄门变为男人的方法称为「男术」,将男人变为黄门的方法称为「黄门术」。然而,这样做只能使其无欲望,无法消除性别特征。「地基业」:在未建地基上建造房屋。「地基遍作」:说“取此及彼来”后,进行地基祭祀。「漱口」:以水净口。「沐浴」:为他人沐浴。「火供」:为他们作火供养。「催吐」:给药催吐。「泻下」:同理。「上泻」:向上排泄污秽。「下泻」:向下排泄污秽。「头泻」:从头部排泄。「耳油」:为绑缚耳朵或愈合伤口而煮制的药油。「眼药油」:眼药所用的油。「鼻药」:以油调和后用作鼻药。「药墨」:能去除二三层膜的药墨。「清凉药墨」:清凉的药墨。「杆茅术」:杆茅医术。「手术」:外科手术。「儿科」:称作儿科的治疗。「不施用根药」:以此显示身体治疗。「撤药」:……显示巴利原文
27.Santikammanti devaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā sace me idaṃ nāma samijjhissati, tumhākaṃ iminā ca iminā ca upahāraṃ karissāmīti samiddhikāle kattabbaṃ santipaṭissavakammaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana samiddhe tassa karaṇaṃ paṇidhikammaṃ nāma. Bhūrikammanti bhūrighare vasitvā gahitamantassa payogakaraṇaṃ. Vassakammaṃ vossakammanti ettha vassoti puriso, vossoti paṇḍako . Iti vossassa vassakaraṇaṃ vassakammaṃ, vassassa vossakaraṇaṃ vossakammaṃ. Taṃ pana karonto acchandikabhāvamattaṃ pāpeti, na liṅgaṃ antaradhāpetuṃ sakkoti. Vatthukammanti akatavatthusmiṃ gehapatiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Vatthuparikammanti ‘‘idañcidañcāharathā’’ti vatvā vatthubalikammakaraṇaṃ. Ācamananti udakena mukhasuddhikaraṇaṃ. Nhāpananti aññesaṃ nhāpanaṃ. Juhananti tesaṃ atthāya aggijuhanaṃ. Vamananti yogaṃ datvā vamanakaraṇaṃ. Virecanepi eseva nayo. Uddhaṃvirecananti uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ. Adhovirecananti adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ. Sīsavirecananti sirovirecanaṃ. Kaṇṇatelanti kaṇṇānaṃ bandhanatthaṃ vā vaṇaharaṇatthaṃ vā bhesajjatelapacanaṃ. Nettatappananti akkhitappanatelaṃ. Natthukammanti telena yojetvā natthukaraṇaṃ. Añjananti dve vā tīṇi vā paṭalāni nīharaṇasamatthaṃ khārañjanaṃ. Paccañjananti nibbāpanīyaṃ sītalabhesajjañjanaṃ. Sālākiyanti salākavejjakammaṃ. Sallakattiyanti sallakattavejjakammaṃ. Dārakatikicchā vuccati komārabhaccavejjakammaṃ. Mūlabhesajjānaṃ anuppādananti iminā kāyatikicchanaṃ dasseti. Osadhīnaṃ paṭimokkhoti khārādīni datvā tadanurūpe vaṇe gate tesaṃ apanayanaṃ.
前际论者常见论解说显示巴利原文
Pubbantakappikasassatavādavaṇṇanā
28 如此,依梵天所说之言,详释三种戒后,今依比丘僧所说之言,以“比丘们,更有甚深、难见之法”等理趣,开始阐明空性。此处,“法”一词,可用于功德、教说、经教、无众生等意义。显示巴利原文
28. Evaṃ brahmadattena vuttavaṇṇassa anusandhivasena tividhaṃ sīlaṃ vitthāretvā idāni bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇassa anusandhivasena – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā duddasā’’tiādinā nayena suññatāpakāsanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha dhammāti guṇe, desanāyaṃ, pariyattiyaṃ, nissatteti evamādīsu dhammasaddo vattati.
正法与非法,两者果报绝不相等;
非法导向地狱,正法则令达善趣。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na hi dhammo adhammo ca, ubho samavipākino; Adhammo nirayaṃ neti, dhammo pāpeti suggati’’nti. (theragā. 304);
在“非法导向地狱,正法导向善趣”(《长老偈》304)等句中,“法”指功德;在“诸比丘,我为汝等说初善之法……”(《中部》3.420)等句中,指教说;在“此处,比丘学习法——契经、应颂……”(《增支部》5.73)等句中,指圣典;在“其时,有诸法,有诸蕴……”(《法集论》121)等句中,指非众生。而在此处,则指功德。因此,“诸比丘,如来有其它的功德”一句,应作如是解。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu hi guṇe dhammasaddo. ‘‘Dhammaṃ, vo bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇa’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.420) desanāyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇāti suttaṃ , geyya’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyattiyaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā honti, khandhā hontī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 121) nissatte. Idha pana guṇe vattati. Tasmā atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva tathāgatassa guṇāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
「甚深」:犹如大海,除如来之外,其余人的智慧如同蚊子的嘴尖,既无法触及,也无处立足。正因甚深,故「难见」;正因难见,故「难觉悟」。因一切热恼悉已寂灭,故为「寂静」;也因其行于寂静的所缘,故亦为「寂静」。因具不令餍足之义,故是「殊妙」,犹如味道美妙的食物。由于是最高智慧的行境,故非思辨所能游履,即「非思辨所行境」。「微妙」指其本质细密。「唯智者能知」:因为这不是愚者的行境,所以唯有智者方能证知。显示巴利原文
Gambhīrāti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra tathāgatā aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā, gambhīrattāyeva duddasā. Duddasattāyeva duranubodhā. Nibbutasabbapariḷāhattā santā, santārammaṇesu pavattanatopi santā. Atittikaraṇaṭṭhena paṇītā, sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Uttamañāṇavisayattā na takkena avacaritabbāti atakkāvacarā. Nipuṇāti saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā. Bālānaṃ avisayattā, paṇḍitehiyeva veditabbāti paṇḍitavedanīyā.
「如来自己证知、现证之后所宣说的」:指那些法,是如来不依赖他人,自己以殊胜的智慧亲证之后,所宣说、阐明、讲说、开示的,这是其含义。「由于那些」:指由于哪些功德法。「如实」:就是如其真实地。「正在说着……会正确地宣说」:如果有人想赞叹如来的功德,他会正确地宣说,能够毫无遗漏地宣说,这是其含义。那么,被世尊如此赞叹的法究竟是什么呢?是一切知智。如果是这样,为什么在经中用了复数来表达呢?这是因为此智与多种心相应,也具有多种所缘。此智是在四种与智相应的大唯作心中获得的,对它来说,没有任何一法不是它的所缘。正如所说:“能知过去的一切,所以是一切知智;于彼没有障碍,所以是无障智”等(《无碍解道》1.120)。因此,由于与多种心相应,由于一再生起,也由于有多种所缘,所以用了复数的表述。显示巴利原文
Ye tathāgato sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ye dhamme tathāgato anaññaneyyo hutvā sayameva abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ katvā pavedeti, dīpeti, katheti, pakāsetīti attho. Yehīti yehi guṇadhammehi. Yathābhuccanti yathābhūtaṃ. Vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamānā vadeyyunti tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vattukāmā sammā vadeyyuṃ, ahāpetvā vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyunti attho. Katame ca pana te dhammā bhagavatā evaṃ thomitāti? Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā bahuvacananiddeso katoti? Puthucittasamāyogato ceva, puthuārammaṇato ca. Tañhi catūsu ñāṇasampayuttamahākiriyacittesu labbhati, na cassa koci dhammo ārammaṇaṃ nāma na hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘atītaṃ sabbaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.120). Iti puthucittasamāyogato punappunaṃ uppattivasena puthuārammaṇato ca bahuvacananiddeso katoti.
「是〔与这些〕不同的」:这是一个用来简别、区分的词,应该这样结合到所有词语上:“是〔与这些〕不同的,不同于离杀生等学处。是甚深的,而非浅显的。”因为,虽然声闻波罗蜜智是甚深的,但辟支菩提智比它更深——对于这种关系,并没有作简别;而一切知智又比辟支菩提智更深——对此也没有作简别;然而,再没有比一切知智更深的东西了,所以“是甚深的”这种简别才得以成立。同样地,“是难见的”也好,“是难觉悟的”也好,都应该这样理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aññevā’’ti idaṃ panettha vavatthāpanavacanaṃ, ‘‘aññeva, na pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo. Gambhīrāva na uttānā’’ti evaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ. Sāvakapāramīñāṇañhi gambhīraṃ, paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ pana tato gambhīrataranti tattha vavatthānaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇañca tatopi gambhīrataranti tatthāpi vavatthānaṃ natthi, ito panaññaṃ gambhīrataraṃ natthi; tasmā gambhīrā vāti vavatthānaṃ labbhati. Tathā duddasāva duranubodhā vāti sabbaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“诸比丘,哪些是这些呢?”——这是为了阐明那些法而提出的问题。“诸比丘,有一些沙门、婆罗门……”等,则是问题的解答。那么,为何要这样开始呢?因为当佛陀触及四个领域时,他们的狮子吼便极其宏大,智慧得以深入,佛陀智慧的广大得以显现,说法变得甚深,贯穿三相,与空相应。哪四个领域呢?戒律的制定、范畴的界定、缘起的方式、教理的分类。因此,当有事例发生时,对于“这是轻的,这是重的,这是可治的,这是不可治的,这是犯,这是非犯,这是断头罪,这是可出罪,这是可忏悔罪,这是世间所呵责的,这是施设所呵责的,对此事应这样制定”等的学处制立,其他人并没有力量或能力;这不是其他人的领域,唯是如来的领域。这样,当触及戒律的制定时,佛陀们的狮子吼变得宏大,智慧深入……乃至与空相应。显示巴利原文
Katameca te bhikkhaveti ayaṃ pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchā. Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇātiādi pucchāvissajjanaṃ. Kasmā panetaṃ evaṃ āraddhanti ce? Buddhānañhi cattāri ṭhānāni patvā gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati, buddhañāṇassa mahantabhāvo paññāyati, desanā gambhīrā hoti, tilakkhaṇāhatā, suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttā. Katamāni cattāri? Vinayapaññattiṃ, bhūmantaraṃ, paccayākāraṃ, samayantaranti. Tasmā – ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, ayaṃ āpatti, ayaṃ anāpatti, ayaṃ chejjagāminī, ayaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminī, ayaṃ desanāgāminī, ayaṃ lokavajjā, ayaṃ paṇṇattivajjā, imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ idaṃ paññapetabba’’nti yaṃ evaṃ otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ nāma, tattha aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi; avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo. Iti vinayapaññattiṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati…pe… suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
同样地,例如:这些称为四念处……乃至……称为圣八支道,称为五蕴,称为十二处,称为十八界,称为四圣谛,称为二十二根,称为九因,称为四食,称为七触,称为七受,称为七想,称为七思,称为七心。在这些法中,有这么多的欲界系法,这么多属于色界、无色界系的法,这么多的世间法,这么多的出世间法——像这样,以二十四缘广作分别、义理无穷的阿毗达摩藏,其他人并没有力量或能力去加以分别解说;这不是其他人的领域,唯是如来的领域。由此,当触及范畴的界定时,佛陀们的狮子吼变得宏大,智慧深入……乃至与空相应。显示巴利原文
Tathā ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā nāma…pe… ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo nāma, pañca khandhā nāma, dvādasa āyatanāni nāma, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo nāma, cattāri ariyasaccāni nāma, bāvīsatindriyāni nāma, nava hetū nāma, cattāro āhārā nāma, satta phassā nāma, satta vedanā nāma, satta saññā nāma, satta cetanā nāma, satta cittāni nāma. Etesu ettakā kāmāvacarā dhammā nāma, ettakā rūpāvacaraarūpāvacarapariyāpannā dhammā nāma, ettakā lokiyā dhammā nāma, ettakā lokuttarā dhammā nāmāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ anantanayaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ vibhajitvā kathetuṃ aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi, avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo. Iti bhūmantaraparicchedaṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati…pe… suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
同样地,此无明以九种方式成为行的缘:即以生起而成为缘,以转起而成为缘,以相而成为缘,以造作而成为缘,以结合而成为缘,以障碍而成为缘,以集起而成为缘,以因而成为缘,以缘而成为缘。同样地,行等也以九种方式成为识等的缘。如所说:“如何是缘摄受慧之法住智?无明对于行,有生起住立、转起住立、相住立、造作住立、结合住立、障碍住立、集起住立、因住立、缘住立——以此九种方式,无明是缘,行是缘所生;此二法皆为缘所生,如是于缘的摄受中,慧是法住智。于过去时、未来时,无明对于行亦有生起住立……乃至……缘住立。生对于老死,有生起住立……乃至……缘住立——以此九种方式,生是缘,老死是缘所生;此二法皆为缘所生,如是于缘的摄受中,慧是法住智。”像这样,将此依各自缘性而转起的三轮、三时、三连结、四摄、二十行相的缘起,加以分别解说,是其他人没有力量或能力的;这不是其他人的领域,唯是如来的领域。如此,当触及缘起的方式时,佛陀们的狮子吼变得宏大,智慧深入……乃至……与空相应。显示巴利原文
Tathā ayaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ navahākārehi paccayo hoti, uppādo hutvā paccayo hoti, pavattaṃ hutvā, nimittaṃ, āyūhanaṃ, saṃyogo, palibodho, samudayo, hetu, paccayo hutvā paccayo hoti, tathā saṅkhārādayo viññāṇādīnaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kathaṃ paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ? Avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhiti ca pavattaṭṭhiti ca, nimittaṭṭhiti ca, āyūhanaṭṭhiti ca, saṃyogaṭṭhiti ca, palibodhaṭṭhiti ca, samudayaṭṭhiti ca, hetuṭṭhiti ca, paccayaṭṭhiti ca, imehi navahākārehi avijjā paccayo, saṅkhārā paccayasamuppannā, ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Atītampi addhānaṃ, anāgatampi addhānaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhiti ca…pe… jāti jarāmaraṇassa uppādaṭṭhiti ca…pe… paccayaṭṭhiti ca, imehi navahākārehi jāti paccayo, jarāmaraṇaṃ paccayasamuppannaṃ, ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.45). Evamimaṃ tassa tassa dhammassa tathā tathā paccayabhāvena pavattaṃ tivaṭṭaṃ tiyaddhaṃ tisandhiṃ catusaṅkhepaṃ vīsatākāraṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ vibhajitvā kathetuṃ aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi, avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo, iti paccayākāraṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati…pe… suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
如此,有四种常住论者、四种一分常住论者、四种有边无边论者、四种诡辩论者、两种无因生论者、十六种有想论者、八种无想论者、八种非想非非想论者、七种断灭论者、五种现法涅槃论者。他们依此而执此——能如此将六十二种邪见分解、剔除其缠结、无有杂乱地宣说出来,是其他人所没有的力量与能力;这并非他人的行境,唯是如来的行境。如是,每当获得适当时机,诸佛的狮子吼便显得宏大,智慧甚深,佛陀智慧的广博得以显现,说法变得深邃,贯穿三相,与空相应。显示巴利原文
Tathā cattāro janā sassatavādā nāma, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā nāma. Te idaṃ nissāya idaṃ gaṇhantīti dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni bhinditvā nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā kathetuṃ aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi, avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo. Iti samayantaraṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati, buddhañāṇassa mahantatā paññāyati, desanā gambhīrā hoti, tilakkhaṇāhatā, suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
然而,在此处获得了适当时机,因此,为了显示一切知智的广博,也为了揭示与阐明说法的空性,法王契入这一适当时机,以“诸比丘,有某类沙门婆罗门……”如是开始了问答。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne samayantaraṃ labbhati, tasmā sabbaññutaññāṇassa mahantabhāvadassanatthaṃ desanāya ca suññatāpakāsanavibhāvanatthaṃ samayantaraṃ anupavisanto dhammarājā – ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’ti evaṃ pucchāvissajjanaṃ ārabhi.
29 其中,“有”(santi)指存在、被找到、可得。“诸比丘”(bhikkhave)是呼唤语。“某类”(eke)指一部分。“沙门婆罗门”(samaṇabrāhmaṇā):因出家而成为沙门,因出身而为婆罗门;或者被世间共同认可为沙门和婆罗门。执取前际、构想前际而执持者,称为“前际执想者”(pubbantakappikā);或者他们拥有对前际的构想,故称“前际执想者”。于此,“际”(anta)一词可见用于边际、内部、界限、低劣、终尽、部分等义。如在“肠满腹满”等处,“际”指边际。在“他们游走于世间,随顺覆藏,内不净而外现庄严”(相应部)等处,指内部。在“腰带的内侧磨损”(律藏)中也是如此。在“她到达绿地之边、路之边、山岩之边、水之边”(中部)等处,指界限。在“诸比丘,这是活命中的最低劣者,即乞食”(相应部)等处,指低劣。在“这就是苦的终极”(相应部)等处,指终尽部分。因为一切缘的灭尽即是苦的终尽部分、称为尽头。在“贤友,有身是一边”(增支部)等处,指部分。而在此处,“际”也用于部分。显示巴利原文
29. Tattha santīti atthi saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti. Bhikkhaveti ālapanavacanaṃ. Eketi ekacce. Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjūpagatabhāvena samaṇā, jātiyā brāhmaṇā. Lokena vā samaṇāti ca brāhmaṇāti ca evaṃ sammatā. Pubbantaṃ kappetvā vikappetvā gaṇhantīti pubbantakappikā. Pubbantakappo vā etesaṃ atthīti pubbantakappikā. Tattha antoti ayaṃ saddo antaabbhantaramariyādalāmakaparabhāgakoṭṭhāsesu dissati. ‘‘Antapūro udarapūro’’tiādīsu hi ante antasaddo. ‘‘Caranti loke parivārachannā anto asuddhā bahi sobhamānā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.122) abbhantare. ‘‘Kāyabandhanassa anto jīrati (cūḷava. 278). ‘‘Sā haritantaṃ vā panthantaṃ vā selantaṃ vā udakantaṃ vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.304) mariyādāyaṃ. ‘‘Antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikānaṃ yadidaṃ piṇḍolya’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.80) lāmake. ‘‘Esevanto dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) parabhāge. Sabbapaccayasaṅkhayo hi dukkhassa parabhāgo koṭīti vuccati. ‘‘Sakkāyo kho, āvuso, eko anto’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 6.61) koṭṭhāse. Svāyaṃ idhāpi koṭṭhāse vattati.
「劫」一词也用于多种含义,如“请世尊住世一劫”(《长部》)、“有时间躺下”(《增支部》)、“以已作净的衣缝合未作净的衣”(《波逸提》)等,出现在寿量劫、小劫、律劫等之中。应知在此处,它是指渴爱与见。也这样说:“劫有两种,即渴爱劫与见劫。”(《大义释》)。因此,基于渴爱与见,构想、分别过去诸蕴而住立者,便称为“前际执想者”,应如此理解此处的含义。对于这般执取前际而住立者,由于一再生起随从前际的见,故称为“前际随见者”。他们怀有这种见,依止、缘于该前际,也使他人成为见行者,并以十八种事由宣说种种胜解语句。显示巴利原文
Kappasaddopi – ‘‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante bhagavā kappaṃ’’ (dī. ni. 2.167), ‘‘atthi kappo nipajjituṃ’’ (a. ni. 8.80), ‘‘kappakatena akappakataṃ saṃsibbitaṃ hotī’’ti, (pāci. 371) evaṃ āyukappalesakappavinayakappādīsu sambahulesu atthesu vattati. Idha taṇhādiṭṭhīsu vattatīti veditabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘kappāti dve kappā, taṇhākappo ca diṭṭhikappo cā’’ti (mahāni. 28). Tasmā taṇhādiṭṭhivasena atītaṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsaṃ kappetvā pakappetvā ṭhitāti pubbantakappikāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Tesaṃ evaṃ pubbantaṃ kappetvā ṭhitānaṃ punappunaṃ uppajjanavasena pubbantameva anugatā diṭṭhīti pubbantānudiṭṭhino. Te evaṃdiṭṭhino taṃ pubbantaṃ ārabbha āgamma paṭicca aññampi janaṃ diṭṭhigatikaṃ karontā anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi.
其中,“种种”指多种多样。“胜解语句”即增语、言句;或者,因为诸见超越真实义、不依实相而执持转起,故称为“胜解”。诸胜解的语句便是“胜解语句”,意指表达见地的言辞。“以十八种事由”即是以十八种原因。显示巴利原文
Tattha anekavihitānīti anekavidhāni. Adhimuttipadānīti adhivacanapadāni. Atha vā bhūtaṃ atthaṃ abhibhavitvā yathāsabhāvato aggahetvā pavattanato adhimuttiyoti diṭṭhiyo vuccanti. Adhimuttīnaṃ padāni adhimuttipadāni, diṭṭhidīpakāni vacanānīti attho. Aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhīti aṭṭhārasahi kāraṇehi.
30 现在,为了说明他们以这十八种事由所宣说的内容,便以“那些尊者……”等语提问,以此方式发问后,为分别显示种种事由,而说“诸比丘,有……”等。其中,他们依此而说,故称为“说”,这是恶见的同义词。持有“常”之说者,即是“常住论者”,也就是执持常见者。依此类推,此后对其他类似词语的含义也应如此了知。“常住的我和世间”:他们执取色等中的某一种为“我”与“世间”,并将其安立为常住、不灭、恒常、稳固。正如所说:“他们安立‘色是我、亦是世间,且为常’而作我及世间;同样地,安立受、想、行、识是我、亦是世间,且为常,而作我及世间。”显示巴利原文
30. Idāni yehi aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi abhivadanti, tesaṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchāya ‘‘te ca kho bhonto’’tiādinā nayena pucchitvā tāni vatthūni vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘santi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhigatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sassato vādo etesanti sassatavādā, sassatadiṭṭhinoti attho. Eteneva nayena ito paresampi evarūpānaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Sassataṃ attānañca lokañcāti rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā taṃ sassataṃ amaraṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ paññapenti. Yathāha – ‘‘rūpaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapenti tathā vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti.
31 在“热勤”等词中,精进因具有烧灼烦恼的作用,故称为“热勤”;此精进因策励之用,名为“策励”;因反复投入之用,名为“专修”。如此,依止、依靠、缘摄这三种精进,便是其义。“不放逸”指不远离念。“如理作意”指方法作意、根本作意,从义理上说即是智。因为安住于彼作意时,宿住随念智得以成就,此处正是以此作意为意趣。因此,依止精进、念与智,便是此处的要义。“如是类”指如是种类。“心定”即心之定。“触证”指获得、证得。当心等持,由他们持而正确安住、善置于心时,种种宿住等义,如《清净道论》所述。显示巴利原文
31.Ātappamanvāyātiādīsu vīriyaṃ kilesānaṃ ātāpanabhāvena ātappanti vuttaṃ. Tadeva padahanavasena padhānaṃ. Punappunaṃ yuttavasena anuyogoti. Evaṃ tippabhedaṃ vīriyaṃ anvāya āgamma paṭiccāti attho. Appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso. Sammā manasikāroti upāyamanasikāro, pathamanasikāro, atthato ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmiñhi manasikāre ṭhitassa pubbenivāsānussati ñāṇaṃ ijjhati, ayaṃ imasmiṃ ṭhāne manasikāroti adhippeto. Tasmā vīriyañca satiñca ñāṇañca āgammāti ayamettha saṅkhepattho. Tathārūpanti tathājātikaṃ. Cetosamādhinti cittasamādhiṃ. Phusatīti vindati paṭilabhati. Yathā samāhite citteti yena samādhinā sammā āhite suṭṭhu ṭhapite cittamhi anekavihitaṃpubbenivāsantiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge vutto.
他这样说道:他成就了禅那的威力后,成为一位见行者,便这样宣称。“不孕”:如同不孕的母畜、不结果的棕榈树等,不能产生任何结果。以此表明,他否定了被执取为“我”和“世间”的那些禅那等能产生色等事物的说法。“如山般稳固”:如大山峰顶般稳固不动。“如柱坚立”:如同门柱深埋于地,稳固竖立,即如深埋的门柱般丝毫不摇动。这两个比喻都说明世间不毁灭。有些人将经文读作“如芦苇内芯般竖立”,并解释说:如同芦苇中的芯那样安住。其意为:所谓“出生”一事,就如芦苇中的芯,本来存在,只是显现出来而已。由于如芯柱般坚立不动,那些有情便如此流转,从此处到另一处。显示巴利原文
So evamāhāti so evaṃ jhānānubhāvasampanno hutvā diṭṭhigatiko evaṃ vadati. Vañjhoti vañjhapasuvañjhatālādayo viya aphalo kassaci ajanakoti. Etena ‘‘attā’’ti ca ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahitānaṃ jhānādīnaṃ rūpādijanakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhitoti kūṭaṭṭho. Esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitoti esikaṭṭhāyī viya hutvā ṭhitoti esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito. Yathā sunikhāto esikatthambho niccalo tiṭṭhati, evaṃ ṭhitoti attho. Ubhayenapi lokassa vināsābhāvaṃ dīpeti. Keci pana īsikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitoti pāḷiṃ vatvā muñje īsikā viya ṭhitoti vadanti . Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yadidaṃ jāyatīti vuccati, taṃ muñjato īsikā viya vijjamānameva nikkhamati. Yasmā ca īsikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito, tasmā teva sattā sandhāvanti, ito aññattha gacchantīti attho.
“流转”:指一再地迁移轮转。“死”:指死去离开。“生”:指这样再生。然而在注疏中,这人先前说过“常住的我和世间”,现在又说“那些有情流转、死去、再生”等,这便使得此见行者自己推翻了自己的主张。见行者的见解并不固定,如同埋在灰堆里的木桩般摇摆不定;也如同疯人的篮子中,糕点块等好东西与粪便、牛粪等污物混杂一处,他的见解也是如此善恶混杂。在“等同于常住”这条见解中,他们将“常住”理解为如大地般恒常存在,也理解为如须弥山、日月般恒常,并认为自己与那些一样,所以说“确实等同于常住”。显示巴利原文
Saṃsarantīti aparāparaṃ sañcaranti. Cavantīti evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Tathā upapajjantīti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pubbe ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti vatvā idāni te ca sattā sandhāvantītiādinā vacanena ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko attanāyeva attano vādaṃ bhindati, diṭṭhigatikassa dassanaṃ nāma na nibaddhaṃ, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇu viya cañcalaṃ, ummattakapacchiyaṃ pūvakhaṇḍagūthagomayādīni viya cettha sundarampi asundarampi hoti yevāti vuttaṃ. Atthitveva sassatisamanti ettha sassatīti niccaṃ vijjamānatāya mahāpathaviṃva maññati, tathā sinerupabbatacandimasūriye. Tato tehi samaṃ attānaṃ maññamānā atthi tveva sassatisamanti vadanti.
现在,为了证明“我与世间是常”等主张,佛陀开示其因由,说:“那是什么原因呢?因为我依于精勤……”等。其中,“由此我对此了知”,意思是:我通过这种殊胜的证得而现量了知此事,并非仅仅基于单纯的信仰而这样说。这里的“m”(我)只是连音所用。在“事由”一词所涉及的四种处中,这是第一处;亦即能回忆十万生,这就是第一个原因,应作此解。显示巴利原文
Idāni sassato attā ca loko cātiādikāya paṭiññāya sādhanatthaṃ hetuṃ dassento ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha imināmahaṃ etaṃ jānāmīti iminā visesādhigamena ahaṃ etaṃ paccakkhato jānāmi, na kevalaṃ saddhāmattakeneva vadāmīti dasseti, makāro panettha padasandhikaraṇatthaṃ vutto. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ ṭhānanti catūhi vatthūhīti vatthusaddena vuttesu catūsu ṭhānesu idaṃ paṭhamaṃ ṭhānaṃ, idaṃ jātisatasahassamattānussaraṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ kāraṇanti attho.
32-33 32-33. 后面两种变式,方法也是如此。只是这一变式是依于能回忆无量百千生而说;另外两种则是依于能回忆十个成坏劫、四十个成坏劫而说。因为钝根的外道只能忆起无量百千生,中根者能忆起十个成坏劫,利根者能忆起四十个成坏劫,无法超过此数。显示巴利原文
32-33. Upari vāradvayepi eseva nayo. Kevalañhi ayaṃ vāro anekajātisatasahassānussaraṇavasena vutto. Itare dasacattālīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappānussaraṇavasena. Mandapañño hi titthiyo anekajātisatasahassamattaṃ anussarati, majjhimapañño dasasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappāni, tikkhapañño cattālīsaṃ, na tato uddhaṃ.
34 第四种情况中:“推论者”(takkī),意为进行推论的人,或因他有推论而称为推论者。这是指那些经过推论、思考后执取邪见者的称呼。“具足思察者称为思察者”(vīmaṃsī):所谓思察,即衡量、认可、接受。譬如有人先用木杖探察水情,然后进入水中;同样地,有人经过衡量、认可、接受之后才执取其见解,他即可被理解为“思察者”。“以推论所得”:即由推论推导出来,也就是依种种方式推论而得之意。“随思察而行”:即随顺上述那种思察方式而行。“从自己聪慧所生”:指完全是由自己的智慧产生的。“他这样说”:执取了常见论的观点之后,他如此宣称。显示巴利原文
34. Catutthavāre takkayatīti takkī, takko vā assa atthīti takkī. Takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhigāhino etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vīmaṃsāya samannāgatoti vīmaṃsī. Vīmaṃsā nāma tulanā ruccanā khamanā. Yathā hi puriso yaṭṭhiyā udakaṃ vīmaṃsitvā otarati, evameva yo tulayitvā ruccitvā khamāpetvā diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so ‘‘vīmaṃsī’’ti veditabbo. Takkapariyāhatanti takkena pariyāhataṃ, tena tena pariyāyena takketvāti attho. Vīmaṃsānucaritanti tāya vuttappakārāya vīmaṃsāya anucaritaṃ. Sayaṃpaṭibhānanti attano paṭibhānamattasañjātaṃ. Evamāhāti sassatadiṭṭhiṃ gahetvā evaṃ vadati.
其中,推论者有四种:随传闻者、忆念宿生者、有所得者、纯粹推论者。有人听到“曾有一位名为毗输安多罗的国王”等传闻后,便这样推论:“那么,如果世尊就是毗输安多罗,自我便是常住的。”因而执取此见,这称为随传闻者。有人忆念起两生、三生之后,推论说:“我自己过去曾名为某某,因此我是常住的。”这是忆念宿生者。有人由于获得某种成就,便这样推论:“如同我现在快乐,过去也是如此,未来也将如此。”以此执取见解,这称为有所得的推论者。有人仅仅依据“此有故彼有”这样的理则来推论和执取,就称为纯粹推论者。显示巴利原文
Tattha catubbidho takkī – anussutiko, jātissaro, lābhī, suddhatakkikoti. Tattha yo ‘‘vessantaro nāma rājā ahosī’’tiādīni sutvā ‘‘tena hi yadi vessantarova bhagavā, sassato attā’’ti takkayanto diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, ayaṃ anussutiko nāma. Dve tisso jātiyo saritvā – ‘‘ahameva pubbe asukasmiṃ nāma ahosiṃ, tasmā sassato attā’’ti takkayanto jātissaratakkiko nāma. Yo pana lābhitāya ‘‘yathā me idāni attā sukhī hoti, atītepi evaṃ ahosi, anāgatepi bhavissatī’’ti takkayitvā diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, ayaṃ lābhītakkiko nāma. ‘‘Evaṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti takkamatteneva gaṇhanto pana suddhatakkiko nāma.
35 “或以这些中的某一种”:即在这四种事由中,以其中的一种、两种或三种。“除此之外别无”:意思是,除了这些事由之外,对于安立常住论,再也没有其他任何原因了。他如此发出不可退转的狮子吼。显示巴利原文
35.Etesaṃ vā aññatarenāti etesaṃyeva catunnaṃ vatthūnaṃ aññatarena ekena vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā. Natthi ito bahiddhāti imehi pana vatthūhi bahi aññaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇampi sassatapaññattiyā natthīti appaṭivattiyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati.
36 “诸比丘,如来了知此”:诸比丘,如来以种种方式了知这一切四种邪见。接着,为了开示他了知的方式,世尊说:“这些是见处”等。其中,邪见本身就是见处,同时,邪见的原因也是见处。正如经中所说:“什么是八种见处?五蕴是见处,无明是见处,触是见处,想是见处,思惟是见处,不如理作意是见处,恶友是见处,从他人听闻的声也是见处。”(《无碍解道》1.124)“蕴是因,蕴是缘,因为依之为依止而生起,所以蕴也是见处。无明是因……恶友是因。从他人听闻的声是因,从他人听闻的声是缘,因为依之为依止而生起,所以从他人听闻的声也是见处。”“如是执取”:就是这些被称为见处的邪见,被这样执取、采纳和转起。“如是固持”:由于内心毫无疑惑,于是再三执取,最终认定“只有这是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”。而作为原因的见处,则是从所缘、转起及串习等方面被执取的,正如正在被执取时能让各种邪见生起一样;又因为看不到其中的过患,所以一再执取,成为坚固的执持。“有如此之趣”:就会趣向地狱、畜生、饿鬼界这三种苦界中的某一种。显示巴利原文
36.Tayidaṃ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānātīti bhikkhave, taṃ idaṃ catubbidhampi diṭṭhigataṃ tathāgato nānappakārato jānāti. Tato taṃ pajānanākāraṃ dassento ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānātiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhiyova diṭṭhiṭṭhānā nāma. Api ca diṭṭhīnaṃ kāraṇampi diṭṭhiṭṭhānameva. Yathāha ‘‘katamāni aṭṭha diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni? Khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāpi, phassopi , saññāpi, vitakkopi, ayonisomanasikāropi, pāpamittopi, paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti. ‘‘Khandhā hetu, khandhā paccayo diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena, evaṃ khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjā hetu…pe… pāpamitto hetu. Paratoghoso hetu, paratoghoso paccayo diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena, evaṃ paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124). Evaṃgahitāti diṭṭhisaṅkhātā tāva diṭṭhiṭṭhānā – ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti evaṃgahitā ādinnā, pavattitāti attho. Evaṃparāmaṭṭhāti nirāsaṅkacittatāya punappunaṃ āmaṭṭhā parāmaṭṭhā, ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’nti pariniṭṭhāpitā . Kāraṇasaṅkhātā pana diṭṭhiṭṭhānā yathā gayhamānā diṭṭhiyo samuṭṭhāpenti, evaṃ ārammaṇavasena ca pavattanavasena ca āsevanavasena ca gahitā. Anādīnavadassitāya punappunaṃ gahaṇavasena parāmaṭṭhā. Evaṃgatikāti evaṃ nirayatiracchānapettivisayagatikānaṃ aññataragatikā. Evaṃ abhisamparāyāti idaṃ purimapadasseva vevacanaṃ, evaṃvidhaparalokāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“而且如来了知彼”:如来不仅了知那种有原因、有投生趋向的恶见,更了知他们一切法,并了知更超越于此的戒、定,乃至一切知智。“而且他不执取那了知”:他虽然了知如此无上的殊胜,却不生起“我了知”之心,不以渴爱、恶见、我慢的执取而执取那了知。“于不执取者,他自己亲身证知寂灭”:由于不执取的缘故,这样不执取的人便亲自、靠自己证知了那些被执取的烦恼的寂灭。这是在说明:“诸比丘,对如来而言,涅槃已是清晰明了、显而易见的。”显示巴利原文
Tañca tathāgato pajānātīti na kevalañca tathāgato sakāraṇaṃ sagatikaṃ diṭṭhigatameva pajānāti, atha kho tañca sabbaṃ pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṃ sīlañceva samādhiñca sabbaññutaññāṇañca pajānāti. Tañca pajānanaṃ na parāmasatīti tañca evaṃvidhaṃ anuttaraṃ visesaṃ pajānantopi ahaṃ pajānāmīti taṇhādiṭṭhimānaparāmāsavasena tañca na parāmasati. Aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditāti evaṃ aparāmasato cassa aparāmāsapaccayā sayameva attanāyeva tesaṃ parāmāsakilesānaṃ nibbuti viditā. Pākaṭaṃ, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa nibbānanti dasseti.
现在,为了说明如来是以怎样的行道证得那种寂灭,世尊在教导以那些感受本身为业处时,说了“了知诸受的集”等语。那些外道正是对这些感受生起染着,心想“我们将在这里得乐,将在那里得乐”,由此进入了见的稠林。其中,「如实了知」的意思是:通过五种相,如实了知诸受的集——“因无明集而有受集,以缘集的道理,见受蕴的生起;因渴爱集而有受集,以缘集的道理,见受蕴的生起;因业集而有受集,以缘集的道理,见受蕴的生起;因触集而有受集,以缘集的道理,见受蕴的生起(《无碍解道》1.50),见到生起的相,也即见受蕴的生起。”通过五种相,如实了知诸受的灭——“因无明灭而有受灭,以缘灭的道理,见受蕴的灭尽;因渴爱灭而有受灭,以缘灭的道理,见受蕴的灭尽;因业灭而有受灭,以缘灭的道理,见受蕴的灭尽;因触灭而有受灭,以缘灭的道理,见受蕴的灭尽(《无碍解道》1.50),见到变异的相,也即见受蕴的灭尽。”如此如实了知乐味——“缘于受而生起的乐与喜悦,这是受的乐味(《相应部》3.26)。”如此如实了知过患——“受是无常、苦、变易显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāpaṭipannena tathāgatena sā nibbuti adhigatā, taṃ paṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ yāsu vedanāsu rattā titthiyā ‘‘idha sukhino bhavissāma, ettha sukhino bhavissāmā’’ti diṭṭhigahanaṃ pavisanti, tāsaṃyeva vedanānaṃ vasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhanto vedanānaṃ samudayañcātiādimāha. Tattha yathābhūtaṃ viditvāti ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, taṇhāsamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, kammasamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, phassasamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati (paṭi. ma. 1.50). Nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passatī’’ti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena vedanānaṃ samudayaṃ yathābhūtaṃ viditvā; ‘‘avijjānirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati, taṇhānirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati , kammanirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati, phassanirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) imesaṃ pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena vedanānaṃ atthaṅgamaṃ yathābhūtaṃ viditvā, ‘‘yaṃ vedanaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ vedanāya assādo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.26) evaṃ assādañca yathābhūtaṃ viditvā, ‘‘yaṃ vedanā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā, ayaṃ vedanāya ādīnavo’’ti evaṃ ādīnavañca yathābhūtaṃ viditvā, ‘‘yo vedanāya chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṃ, idaṃ vedanāya nissaraṇa’’nti evaṃ nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṃ viditvā vigatachandarāgatāya anupādāno anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato; yasmiṃ upādāne sati kiñci upādiyeyya, upādinnattā ca khandho bhaveyya, tassa abhāvā kiñci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvāva vimutto bhikkhave tathāgatoti.
37 “诸比丘,这些就是那些”:即当我问“诸比丘,哪些法是甚深的?”时,所开示的“诸比丘,这些就是那些法,而且如来了知那些,并了知更超越于此”的一切知智之法。应当了知,它们是甚深、难见……乃至……唯智者所能觉知的。对于这些法,凡夫不能,初果等圣者中的任何一位也不能如实地赞叹如来,唯有当如来自己正确地宣说时,才能被如实地赞叹。如此,发问者所问的正是这一切知智,解答者所解答的也正是这一切知智。这中间则是对诸见的分别解说。显示巴利原文
37.Ime kho te, bhikkhaveti ye te ahaṃ – ‘‘katame, ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā’’ti apucchiṃ, ‘‘ime kho te, bhikkhave, tañca tathāgato pajānāti tato ca uttaritaraṃ pajānātī’’ti evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā gambhīrā duddasā…pe… paṇḍitavedanīyāti veditabbā. Yehi tathāgatassa neva puthujjano, na sotāpannādīsu aññataro vaṇṇaṃ yathābhūtaṃ vattuṃ sakkoti, atha kho tathāgatova yathābhūtaṃ vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyyāti evaṃ pucchamānenāpi sabbaññutaññāṇameva puṭṭhaṃ, niyyātentenāpi tadeva niyyātitaṃ, antarā pana diṭṭhiyo vibhattāti.
部分常住论注释。显示巴利原文
Ekaccasassatavādavaṇṇanā
38 「部分常住论者」:即持部分常住论者。分为二种:主张有情部分常住者,及主张行部分常住者。此二种皆摄于此。显示巴利原文
38.Ekaccasassatikāti ekaccasassatavādā. Te duvidhā honti – sattekaccasassatikā, saṅkhārekaccasassatikāti. Duvidhāpi idha gahitāyeva.
39 「Yanti」仅为不变词。「Kadāci」指任何时候。「Karahaci」是其同义词。「Dīghassa addhuno」指长时间。「Accayena」指经过。「Saṃvaṭṭati」指灭去。「Yebhuyyena」指那些转生在上方梵天界或无色界的有情,这是就其余有情而言。由于从禅那的意所生,故称「意所成」。以喜为食,故称「以喜为食」。自身光明即是「自光明」。行于空中,故称「行于空中」。安住于殊妙的园林、宫殿、如意树等处,故称「住于殊妙处」;或由殊妙、令人悦意的装饰而住,亦名「住于殊妙处」。「长久之时」指最长八劫。显示巴利原文
39.Yanti nipātamattaṃ. Kadācīti kismiñci kāle. Karahacīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Dīghassaaddhunoti dīghassa kālassa. Accayenāti atikkamena . Saṃvaṭṭatīti vinassati. Yebhuyyenāti ye uparibrahmalokesu vā arūpesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṃ. Jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayā. Pīti tesaṃ bhakkho āhāroti pītibhakkhā. Attanova tesaṃ pabhāti sayaṃpabhā. Antalikkhe carantīti antalikkhacarā. Subhesu uyyānavimānakapparukkhādīsu tiṭṭhantīti, subhaṭṭhāyino subhā vā manorammavatthābharaṇā hutvā tiṭṭhantīti subhaṭṭhāyino. Ciraṃ dīghamaddhānanti ukkaṃsena aṭṭha kappe.
40 「Vivaṭṭati」指成立。「空无的梵天宫殿」指因为没有自然化生的有情而空无,意思是梵身地生成。它没有作者,也没有令作者,而是依《清净道论》所说的方法,由业缘、时节生起的宝地所生。在这里,只有在自然化生的处所才会有园林、如意树等生起。然后,有情对原来居住的地方产生爱着,他们修习初禅后从那里命终,因此才接着说「尔时某位有情」等。「因寿尽或因福尽」:那些造了广大福业而转生在某一个短寿天界的人,他们不能依靠自己的福德力而久住,只是随该天界的寿量而命终,所以称为「因寿尽而死」。而那些造了微少福业却转生在长寿天界的人,他们无法活满全部的寿量,中途就命终,所以称为「因福尽而死」。「住于长久之时」指一劫或半劫。显示巴利原文
40.Vivaṭṭatīti saṇṭhāti. Suññaṃ brahmavimānanti pakatiyā nibbattasattānaṃ natthitāya suññaṃ, brahmakāyikabhūmi nibbattatīti attho. Tassa kattā vā kāretā vā natthi, visuddhimagge vuttanayena pana kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā ratanabhūmi nibbattati. Pakatinibbattiṭṭhānesuyeva cettha uyyānakapparukkhādayo nibbattanti. Atha sattānaṃ pakatiyā vasitaṭṭhāne nikanti uppajjati, te paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā tato otaranti, tasmā atha kho aññataro sattotiādimāha. Āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vāti ye uḷāraṃ puññakammaṃ katvā yattha katthaci appāyuke devaloke nibbattanti, te attano puññabalena ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti, tassa pana devalokassa āyuppamāṇeneva cavantīti āyukkhayā cavantīti vuccanti. Ye pana parittaṃ puññakammaṃ katvā dīghāyukadevaloke nibbattanti, te yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti, antarāva cavantīti puññakkhayā cavantīti vuccanti. Dīghamaddhānaṃ tiṭṭhatīti kappaṃ vā upaḍḍhakappaṃ vā.
41 “不满足”是指期盼其他有情也来到此处。而与嗔恚相应的厌倦,在梵天界并不存在。“悚惧”是指怖畏、战栗,这种悚惧有四种:由恐怖而生的悚惧、由渴爱而生的悚惧、由邪见而生的悚惧、由智而生的悚惧。其中,“因投生而起的恐惧、怖畏、惊惶、身毛竖立与心的战栗……因老……因病……因死……而起的战栗”(《分别论》921),这称为由恐怖而生的悚惧。“啊!愿其他有情也得此状态”(《长部》3.38),这称为由渴爱而生的悚惧。“那只是悚惧与骚动而已”,这称为由邪见而生的悚惧。“他们闻如来说法后,大多生起恐惧、悚惧、怖畏”(《增支部》4.33),这称为由智而生的悚惧。于此处,由渴爱而生的悚惧与由邪见而生的悚惧皆可适用。这里的“梵天宫殿”,由于已有第一位化生者存在,故不说为空。“转生”指以再生的方式到达。“同伴”是指同住在一起。显示巴利原文
41.Anabhiratīti aparassāpi sattassa āgamanapatthanā. Yā pana paṭighasampayuttā ukkaṇṭhitā, sā brahmaloke natthi. Paritassanāti ubbijjanā phandanā, sā panesā tāsatassanā, taṇhātassanā, diṭṭhitassanā, ñāṇatassanāti catubbidhā hoti. Tattha ‘‘jātiṃ paṭicca bhayaṃ bhayānakaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃso cetaso utrāso. Jaraṃ… byādhiṃ… maraṇaṃ paṭicca…pe… utrāso’’ti (vibha. 921) ayaṃ tāsatassanā nāma. ‘‘Aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṃ āgaccheyyu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.38) ayaṃ taṇhātassanā nāma. ‘‘Paritassitavipphanditamevā’’ti ayaṃ diṭṭhitassanā nāma. ‘‘Tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’ti (a. ni. 4.33) ayaṃ ñāṇatassanā nāma. Idha pana taṇhātassanāpi diṭṭhitassanāpi vaṭṭati. Brahmavimānanti idha pana paṭhamābhinibbattassa atthitāya suññanti na vuttaṃ. Upapajjantīti upapattivasena upagacchanti. Sahabyatanti sahabhāvaṃ.
42 “阿毗浮”是指征服之后安立,心中想“我是最胜者”。“不被阿毗浮”是指不被其他所征服。“必定”是一个表示决定的词。“以见具十”,指凭借见力能遍观十方,意思是“我见一切”。“自在魔”是指我令一切人随我自在而行。“我是世间的主宰者、创作者、化作者”:我是世间的主宰,我是世间的创作者与化作者,大地、雪山、须弥山、轮围、大海、日月,都是我化现的。“我是最胜者、分配者”:我是世间的最上者与分配者,他这样认为:“你将名为刹帝利,你将名为婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家人、出家人。乃至你将投生为骆驼,你将投生为牛。”他以为:“我这样为有情分配。”“具足自在者、已生者与未生者之父”(《长部》1.17):他因修习而成就自在,所以认为“我是具足自在者,我是已生者和未生者的父亲”。其中,卵生、胎生的有情,在卵壳内及在母胎内时,称为“未生者”;从脱离而出的那一刻起,称为“已生者”。湿生者在第一心识刹那称为“未生者”,从第二刹那起称为“已生者”。化生者在第一威仪姿态时称为“未生者”,从第二姿态起称为“已生者”。应知他正是基于此。显示巴利原文
42.Abhibhūti abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakohamasmīti. Anabhibhūtoti aññehi anabhibhūto. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dassanavasena daso, sabbaṃ passāmīti attho. Vasavattīti sabbaṃ janaṃ vase vattemi. Issaro kattā nimmātāti ahaṃ loke issaro, ahaṃ lokassa kattā ca nimmātā ca, pathavī – himavanta-sineru-cakkavāḷa-mahāsamudda-candima-sūriyā mayā nimmitāti. Seṭṭho sajitāti ahaṃ lokassa uttamo ca sajitā ca, ‘‘tvaṃ khattiyo nāma hohi, tvaṃ brāhmaṇo, vesso, suddo, gahaṭṭho, pabbajito nāma. Antamaso tvaṃ oṭṭho hohi, goṇo hohī’’ti ‘‘evaṃ sattānaṃ saṃvisajetā aha’’nti maññati. Vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānanti (dī. ni. 1.17) ahamasmi ciṇṇavasitāya vasī, ahaṃ pitā bhūtānañca bhabyānañcāti maññati. Tattha aṇḍajajalābujā sattā antoaṇḍakose ceva antovatthimhi ca bhabyā nāma, bahi nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā paṭhamacittakkhaṇe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtā. Opapātikā paṭhamairiyāpathe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtāti veditabbā. Te sabbepi mayhaṃ puttāti saññāya ‘‘ahaṃ pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’nti maññati.
现在,为了依理证成,他在声称“这些有情是我所化”之后,接着说道:“那是什么原因呢?”等等。“此性”指此状态,亦即梵天身。“由此我”是指那些依自己的业而死亡与投生的有情,仅凭妄念便认为“我们是由他所化”,就像将弯钉敲入弯孔一样,顺从地拜倒在他的脚下。显示巴利原文
Idāni kāraṇato sādhetukāmo – ‘‘mayā ime sattā nimmitā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādimāha. Itthattanti itthabhāvaṃ, brahmabhāvanti attho. Iminā mayanti attano kammavasena cutāpi upapannāpi ca kevalaṃ maññanāmatteneva ‘‘iminā mayaṃ nimmitā’’ti maññamānā vaṅkacchidde vaṅkaāṇī viya onamitvā tasseva pādamūlaṃ gacchantīti.
43 「且更容貌庄严」指容貌更为庄严,意思是端正、清净。「更具大威力」指以自在力与眷属来说,威势更为广大。显示巴利原文
43.Vaṇṇavantataro cāti vaṇṇavantataro, abhirūpo pāsādikoti attho. Mahesakkhataroti issariyaparivāravasena mahāyasataro.
44 「这确实是原因」指这确实就是理由。他从那里死后不去别处,只来到此处,即是据此而说。「从在家」指从俗家。「出家」指出家。因为出家时,那里没有耕田、看牛等家业事务,所以称为「出家」。「出家」意为前往、进入那种状态。「此后不忆念」指不能忆念在此之前的过去住处,由于不能忆念,便在那里执取了邪见。显示巴利原文
44.Ṭhānaṃkho panetanti kāraṇaṃ kho panetaṃ. So tato cavitvā aññatra na gacchati, idheva āgacchati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Agārasmāti gehā. Anagāriyanti pabbajjaṃ. Pabbajjā hi yasmā agārassa hi taṃ kasigorakkhādikammaṃ tattha natthi, tasmā anagāriyanti vuccati. Pabbajatīti upagacchati. Tato paraṃ nānussaratīti tato pubbenivāsā paraṃ na sarati, sarituṃ asakkonto tattha ṭhatvā diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti.
在“常”等词中,因为见不到他的再生,所以称之为「常」;因为见不到他的死,所以称之为「恒」;因为始终存在,所以称之为「永恒」;因为即使衰老也不变异,所以称之为「不变异法」。在这第一番中,其余的内容都是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
Niccotiādīsu tassa upapattiṃ apassanto niccoti vadati, maraṇaṃ apassanto dhuvoti, sadābhāvato sassatoti, jarāvasenāpi vipariṇāmassa abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammoti. Sesamettha paṭhamavāre uttānamevāti.
45-46 在第二转的阐释中,“嬉戏腐化者”指因嬉戏而败坏灭亡的天人,所以称为嬉戏腐化者;圣典中也有写作“腐化者”的,但义注里没有这种写法。“过度”指时间过长,也就是太久的意思。“具足笑、嬉戏、喜乐法”指成就并沉溺于笑乐法及嬉戏喜乐法,也就是沉溺于嬉笑之乐以及由身、口所产生的游戏之乐,并以此喜乐法为生活而安住。显示巴利原文
45-46. Dutiyavāre khiḍḍāya padussanti vinassantīti khiḍḍāpadosikā, padūsikātipi pāḷiṃ likhanti, sā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ natthi. Ativelanti atikālaṃ, aticiranti attho. Hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannāti hassarati dhammañceva khiḍḍāratidhammañca samāpannā anuyuttā, keḷihassasukhañceva kāyikavācasikakīḷāsukhañca anuyuttā, vuttappakāraratidhammasamaṅgino hutvā viharantīti attho.
“念忘失”指对于可嚼食、可啖食的正念忘失了。据说,他们凭依殊胜福德所获得的巨大祥瑞与威力,在作星宿娱乐时,由于成就极为广大,以至于连“我们用过饮食没有”也不知晓。从错过一餐的时间开始,即便后来不间断地又嚼又饮,他们依然会死去,无法存活。为什么呢?因为天众的业生火界强,而所生之色身羸弱。在人类中,业生火界弱,所生之色身强。由于人类的火界弱、色身强,哪怕超过七天,也能用温水、清粥等来维持身体。但诸天的火界强,所生之色身羸弱,只要错过一顿饭的时间,就无法安住了。正如在夏季正午,把一朵红莲或青莲放在被晒热的石头上,到了傍晚,哪怕用上百罐水去浇它,它也不能恢复原样,必定会枯萎。同样地,他们后来虽不间断地又嚼又饮,依然会死去,不能存活。因此说:‘由于正念的忘失,那些天众从那个天身死去。’那么,这些是哪些天众呢?义注里并没有辨析说‘就是这些天众’,但因为笼统地说‘诸天的业生火界强,所生之色身羸弱’,所以应当理解,凡是任何依靠段食为生的天众,如果这样做,他们都会死去。有些人显示巴利原文
Sati sammussatīti khādanīyabhojanīyesu sati sammussati. Te kira puññavisesādhigatena mahantena attano sirivibhavena nakkhattaṃ kīḷantā tāya sampattimahantatāya – ‘‘āhāraṃ paribhuñjimha, na paribhuñjimhā’’tipi na jānanti. Atha ekāhārātikkamanato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva, na tiṭṭhanti. Kasmā? Kammajatejassa balavatāya, karajakāyassa mandatāya, manussānañhi kammajatejo mando, karajakāyo balavā. Tesaṃ tejassa mandatāya karajakāyassa balavatāya sattāhampi atikkamitvā uṇhodakaacchayāguādīhi sakkā vatthuṃ upatthambhetuṃ. Devānaṃ pana tejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ mandaṃ. Te ekaṃ āhāravelaṃ atikkamitvāva saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā nāma gimhānaṃ majjhanhike tattapāsāṇe ṭhapitaṃ padumaṃ vā uppalaṃ vā sāyanhasamaye ghaṭasatenāpi siñciyamānaṃ pākatikaṃ na hoti, vinassatiyeva. Evameva pacchā nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva, na tiṭṭhanti. Tenāha ‘‘satiyā sammosā te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti. Katame pana te devāti? Ime devāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāraṇā natthi, ‘‘devānaṃ kammajatejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ manda’’nti avisesena vuttattā pana ye keci kabaḷīkārāhārūpajīvino devā evaṃ karonti, teyeva cavantīti veditabbā. Keci panāhu – ‘‘nimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattino te devā’’ti. Khiḍḍāpadussanamatteneva hete khiḍḍāpadosikāti vuttā. Sesamettha purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
47-48 在第三转的阐释中,“意愤天”指那些因心意污染而毁坏消亡的天人,也就是四大王天的天众。据说在他们之中,有一位天子心想“我要赏玩星宿”,便带着随从驾车上街。这时另一位天子出来,看见他走在前面,心想:“这人真可怜!”就像从未见过一样看着他,恼怒地想:“他简直像因喜悦而鼓胀得快要崩坏一样。”走在前面的天子也转过身,看见那个发怒的人。由于愤怒显而易见,他明白了对方的愤怒,便以暴怒回击:“你发怒,又能拿我怎样?这份成就是我靠布施、持戒等得来的,又不是靠你。”要知道,如果一方愤怒而另一方不怒,还能保住;但如果双方都愤怒,一方的愤怒便成为另一方的缘,另一方的愤怒又成为这一方的缘,结果两人都如同在哭喊、相互阻挠一般而死去。这就是此处的法性。其余的内容,都按前面说过的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
47-48. Tatiyavāre manena padussanti vinassantīti manopadosikā, ete cātumahārājikā. Tesu kira eko devaputto – nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmīti saparivāro rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjati, athañño nikkhamanto taṃ purato gacchantaṃ disvā – ‘bho ayaṃ kapaṇo’, adiṭṭhapubbaṃ viya etaṃ disvā – ‘‘pītiyā uddhumāto viya bhijjamāno viya ca gacchatī’’ti kujjhati. Purato gacchantopi nivattitvā taṃ kuddhaṃ disvā – kuddhā nāma suviditā hontīti kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvā – ‘‘tvaṃ kuddho, mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasi, ayaṃ sampatti mayā dānasīlādīnaṃ vasena laddhā, na tuyhaṃ vasenā’’ti paṭikujjhati. Ekasmiñhi kuddhe itaro akuddho rakkhati, ubhosu pana kuddhesu ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti. Tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ubho kandantānaṃyeva orodhānaṃ cavanti. Ayamettha dhammatā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
49-52 在“推论者之论”中,他看到眼等感官会坏灭;然而,心是前前之心为后后之心的缘而灭去,因此尽管心的坏灭比感官的坏灭更为有力,他却看不见心的坏灭。由于看不见这一点,他便如此执取:如同鸟离开一棵树,去栖息在另一棵树上,在这一期生命衰亡时,心便转赴他处。其余内容,皆如前说方式理解。显示巴利原文
49-52. Takkīvāde ayaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ bhedaṃ passati, cittaṃ pana yasmā purimaṃ purimaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa paccayaṃ datvāva nirujjhati, tasmā cakkhādīnaṃ bhedato balavatarampi cittassa bhedaṃ na passati. So taṃ apassanto yathā nāma sakuṇo ekaṃ rukkhaṃ jahitvā aññasmiṃ nilīyati, evameva imasmiṃ attabhāve bhinne cittaṃ aññatra gacchatīti gahetvā evamāha. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
对「有边无边论」的注释显示巴利原文
Antānantavādavaṇṇanā
53 “有边无边论者”即持边无边论者,意指针对“有边”、“无边”、“亦有边亦无边”、“非有边非无边”而发起议论之人。显示巴利原文
53.Antānantikāti antānantavādā, antaṃ vā anantaṃ vā antānantaṃ vā nevantānānantaṃ vā ārabbha pavattavādāti attho.
54-60 “于世间隔著有边想”:即不将似相扩展到轮围边界,而只执取那个[似相]为“世间”,如此便称为于世间隔著有边想。若将遍处扩展到以轮围边界为限,则成为“无边想”者。若上下不扩展而横向扩展,则于上下为有边想,于横向为无边想。推论者之论亦如前说方式理解。这四种见,皆因执取自己先前所见的相而执持此见,故被摄入“关于前际的思辨者”之中。显示巴利原文
54-60.Antasaññīlokasmiṃ viharatīti paṭibhāganimittaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ avaḍḍhetvā taṃ – ‘‘loko’’ti gahetvā antasaññī lokasmiṃ viharati, cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā vaḍḍhitakasiṇo pana anantasaññī hoti, uddhamadho avaḍḍhetvā pana tiriyaṃ vaḍḍhetvā uddhamadho antasaññī, tiriyaṃ anantasaññī. Takkīvādo vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ime cattāropi attanā diṭṭhapubbānusāreneva diṭṭhiyā gahitattā pubbantakappikesu paviṭṭhā.
对「不死乱见论」的注释显示巴利原文
Amarāvikkhepavādavaṇṇanā
61 “不死”,即不死亡。它指的是什么?就是依循“对我来说,是这样吗?也不是”等理路,为具见者所执持、了无边际的见解与言说。“乱”是种种舍弃与混淆。由于这不死的见解与言说而造成的混淆,称为“不死乱”。具此见者,便是“不死乱论者”。另有一说:世间有一种鱼名为“不死鱼”,它在水中时而浮起,时而沉没,游移不定,难以捕捉。同样,这种论说亦是四处游移,不让人把握其把柄,因此称为“不死乱”。持此论者,即为“不死乱论者”。显示巴利原文
61. Na maratīti amarā. Kā sā? Evantipi me notiādinā nayena pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā ca. Vividho khepoti vikkhepo, amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya ca vikkhepoti amarāvikkhepo, so etesaṃ atthīti amarāvikkhepikā, aparo nayo – amarā nāma ekā macchajāti, sā ummujjananimujjanādivasena udake sandhāvamānā gahetuṃ na sakkāti, evameva ayampi vādo itocito ca sandhāvati, gāhaṃ na upagacchatīti amarāvikkhepoti vuccati. So etesaṃ atthīti amarāvikkhepikā.
62 “他不如实知这是善”,意思是,他不能如实地了知十善业道。同样地,“不善”也是指十不善业道。“那会成为我的妨害”:由于生起“我说了妄语”的追悔,那会成为我的妨害,也就是带来苦。“那会成为我的障碍”:指它会障碍我生天及证道。“因对妄语的怖畏、对妄语的厌离”:是指对妄语心怀惭与愧。“陷入语言的混淆”:即陷入言语的混乱。是怎样的混乱?正是那不死乱见,也就是无有边际的混淆。显示巴利原文
62.‘‘Idaṃkusala’’nti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti dasa kusalakammapathe yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti attho. Akusalepi dasa akusalakammapathāva adhippetā. So mamassa vighātoti ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇita’’nti vippaṭisāruppattiyā mama vighāto assa, dukkhaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. So mamassa antarāyoti so mama saggassa ceva maggassa ca antarāyo assa. Musāvādabhayā musāvādaparijegucchāti musāvāde ottappena ceva hiriyā ca. Vācāvikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti vācāya vikkhepaṃ āpajjati. Kīdisaṃ? Amarāvikkhepaṃ, apariyantavikkhepanti attho.
在“对我来说,是这样吗?也不是”等语句中,“对我来说,是这样吗?也不是”指的是无定准的混淆。“对我来说,是那样吗?也不是”,是在否定“我与世间是常”的常住论。“对我来说,是其他吗?也不是”,是在否定与常住论有别的一分常住论。“对我来说,不是吗?也不是”,是在否定“如来死后不存在”的断灭论。“对我来说,不是‘否’,也不是吗?也不是”,是在否定“既非存在,亦非不存在”的推论者之主张。至于他自己,当被问到“这是善吗?”或“不善”时,始终不给任何明确的回答。若被问“这是善吗?”,他便说:“对我来说,是这样吗?也不是。”接着被问“那么,什么是不善?”时,他又说:“是那样吗?也不是。”再被问“什么与这两者都不同?”时,他说:“是其他吗?也不是。”又被问:“你用这三种方式都说不是,那你的宗义到底是什么?”他便说:“不是吗?也不是。”更被追问:“那么,你的宗义是‘不是否’吗?”他便回答:“不是否,也不是。”他便如此陷入全面的混淆,不立足于任何一方的立场。显示巴利原文
Evantipi me notiādīsu evantipi me noti aniyamitavikkhepo . Tathātipi me noti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti vuttaṃ sassatavādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Aññathātipi me noti sassatato aññathā vuttaṃ ekaccasassataṃ paṭikkhipati. Notipi me noti – ‘‘na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vuttaṃ ucchedaṃ paṭikkhipati. No notipi me noti ‘‘neva hoti na na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ takkīvādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Sayaṃ pana ‘‘idaṃ kusala’’nti vā ‘‘akusala’’nti vā puṭṭho na kiñci byākaroti. ‘‘Idaṃ kusala’’nti puṭṭho ‘‘evantipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ akusala’’nti vutte ‘‘tathātipi me no’’ti vadati. ‘‘Kiṃ ubhayato aññathā’’ti vutte ‘‘aññathātipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘tividhenāpi na hoti, kiṃ te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘notipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ no noti te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘no notipi me no’’ti evaṃ vikkhepameva āpajjati, ekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhati.
63 所谓‘欲或贪’,是指即使并不了知,也轻率地将善断定为善,将不善断定为不善,并在心中思量:‘我如此解答了某个问题,这解答得好不好呢?’于是便去请教其他智者。当那些智者告诉他:‘善友,你解答得真好,你把善说成了善,把不善说成了不善’时,他便心想:‘没有谁像我这样有智慧了。’便由此对此事生起了欲或贪。这其中,欲是指微弱的贪,贪是指强烈的贪。所谓‘瞋或恚’,是指若将善说成不善,或将不善说成善,之后再去请教其他智者,当那些智者说‘你解答得不好’时,他便思量:‘我连这么一点事都不懂。’由此对此事生起了瞋或恚。这其中,瞋是指微弱的忿怒,恚是指强烈的忿怒。显示巴利原文
63.Chando vā rāgo vāti ajānantopi sahasā kusalameva ‘‘kusala’’nti vatvā akusalameva ‘‘akusala’’nti vatvā mayā asukassa nāma evaṃ byākataṃ, kiṃ taṃ subyākatanti aññe paṇḍite pucchitvā tehi – ‘‘subyākataṃ, bhadramukha, kusalameva tayā kusalaṃ, akusalameva akusalanti byākata’’nti vutte natthi mayā sadiso paṇḍitoti evaṃ me tattha chando vā rāgo vā assāti attho. Ettha ca chando dubbalarāgo, rāgo balavarāgo. Doso vā paṭigho vāti kusalaṃ pana ‘‘akusala’’nti, akusalaṃ vā ‘‘kusala’’nti vatvā aññe paṇḍite pucchitvā tehi – ‘‘dubyākataṃ tayā’’ti vutte ettakampi nāma na jānāmīti tattha me assa doso vā paṭigho vāti attho. Idhāpi doso dubbalakodho, paṭigho balavakodho.
所谓‘那即成为我的取,那即成为我的恼害’,是指那欲与贪两者成为我的取,那瞋与恚两者成为恼害。或者,也可以从牢固执取的角度,将两者都视为取;从造成破坏的角度,将两者都视为恼害。因为贪是由于不愿舍离而执取所缘,犹如蚂蟥;瞋是由于想要毁灭而执取,犹如毒蛇。而且,这两者都确实以烧灼的方式造成毁坏,因此被称为‘取’和‘恼害’。其余内容与第一个变例完全相同。显示巴利原文
Taṃmamassa upādānaṃ, so mamassa vighātoti taṃ chandarāgadvayaṃ mama upādānaṃ assa, dosapaṭighadvayaṃ vighāto. Ubhayampi vā daḷhaggahaṇavasena upādānaṃ , vihananavasena vighāto. Rāgo hi amuñcitukāmatāya ārammaṇaṃ gaṇhāti jalūkā viya. Doso vināsetukāmatāya āsīviso viya. Ubhopi cete santāpakaṭṭhena vihananti yevāti ‘‘upādāna’’nti ca ‘‘vighāto’’ti ca vuttā. Sesaṃ paṭhamavārasadisameva.
64 ‘贤智者’,是指具有智慧的人。‘微细者’,是指智慧细致锐利,能够通达微细义理的人。‘已熟知外道学说者’,是指已经了解外道学说,且与他人进行过辩论探讨的人。‘如能射穿毛发的弓箭手’,意思是他们如同能射穿毛发的弓箭手一般。说‘他们以自所见而摧破他见’,意思是犹如神箭手能射中毛发一般,他们以自己获得的智慧,去破除他人那些极为微细的成见。‘那些人对我如此追问’,是指那些沙门与婆罗门,当我面对这些善与不善时,对我这般追问。‘将会追问’,是指他们会询问:‘什么是善?什么是不善?说出你自己的见解来。’这样来询问他的见解。‘将会执问’,是指当他说出‘这是某某’之后,他们会追问:‘你凭什么理由来支持这个观点?’这样来询问其理由。‘将会驳问’,是指……显示巴利原文
64.Paṇḍitāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā. Nipuṇāti saṇhasukhumabuddhino sukhumaatthantaraṃ paṭivijjhanasamatthā. Kataparappavādāti viññātaparappavādā ceva parehi saddhiṃ katavādaparicayā ca. Vālavedhirūpāti vālavedhidhanuggahasadisā. Te bhindantā maññeti vālavedhi viya vālaṃ sukhumānipi paresaṃ diṭṭhigatāni attano paññāgatena bhindantā viya carantīti attho. Te maṃ tatthāti te samaṇabrāhmaṇā maṃ tesu kusalākusalesu. Samanuyuñjeyyunti ‘‘kiṃ kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusalanti attano laddhiṃ vadā’’ti laddhiṃ puccheyyuṃ. Samanugāheyyunti ‘‘idaṃ nāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘kena kāraṇena etamatthaṃ gāheyyu’’nti kāraṇaṃ puccheyyuṃ. Samanubhāseyyunti ‘‘iminā nāma kāraṇenā’’ti vutte kāraṇe dosaṃ dassetvā ‘‘na tvaṃ idaṃ jānāsi, idaṃ pana gaṇha, idaṃ vissajjehī’’ti evaṃ samanuyuñjeyyuṃ. Na sampāyeyyanti na sampādeyyaṃ, sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkuṇeyyanti attho. So mamassa vighātoti yaṃ taṃ punappunaṃ vatvāpi asampāyanaṃ nāma, so mama vighāto assa, oṭṭhatālujivhāgalasosanadukkhameva assāti attho. Sesametthāpi paṭhamavārasadisameva.
65-66 迟钝者(manda):指智慧迟钝者,这正是一个无智慧者的称呼。极愚者(momūha):指极度昏昧者。在“如来存在”(hoti tathāgato)等说法中,是以“有情”来指代如来的。其余此处皆浅显易懂。这四种见也是随顺先前流转的法而执取见,由此被归入探讨前际(pubbanta)的论者之中。显示巴利原文
65-66.Mandoti mandapañño apaññassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Momūhoti atisammūḷho. Hotitathāgatotiādīsu satto ‘‘tathāgato’’ti adhippeto. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imepi cattāro pubbe pavattadhammānusāreneva diṭṭhiyā gahitattā pubbantakappikesu paviṭṭhā.
无因生论者(adhiccasamuppannavāda)的解释显示巴利原文
Adhiccasamuppannavādavaṇṇanā
67 认为“我与世间是无因生起”(adhiccasamuppanna)的见解,即是无因生见。由于他们持此见解,故被称为无因生论者(adhiccasamuppannikā)。无因生(adhiccasamuppanna),意思是没有原因而生起。显示巴利原文
67. ‘‘Adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko cā’’ti dassanaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ. Taṃ etesaṃ atthīti adhiccasamuppannikā. Adhiccasamuppannanti akāraṇasamuppannaṃ.
68-73 无想有情(asaññasattā):这里是以教导的要点为名,意指只有色法构成、心中不生起心识的个体。他们的转生方式应当这样理解:有一个人在外道处出家后,以风遍(vāyokasiṇa)为所缘作预备行(parikamma),证得第四禅那。从禅那出定后,他见到心的过患:“有心存在时,就会有像断手之类的痛苦和一切怖畏。此心实在多余,无心(acittaka)的状态才是寂静。”他这样见到心的过患后,由于禅那并未退失,命终之后便转生于无想有情天。在那里,他的心识在死心(cuticitta)灭尽时即就此止息,唯有色蕴(rūpakkhandha)独自显现。他们安住的情形,好比一支随弓弦力量射出的箭:弓弦的力量有多大,箭便在空中飞行多远。同样,他们依靠禅那力投生后,禅那力能维持多久,他们便安住多久。当禅那力耗尽时,彼处的色蕴便消失,而在此地则生起了结生想(paṭisandhisaññā)。然而,显示巴利原文
68-73.Asaññasattāti desanāsīsametaṃ, acittuppādā rūpamattakaattabhāvāti attho. Tesaṃ evaṃ uppatti veditabbā – ekacco hi titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā jhānā vuṭṭhāya – ‘‘citte dosaṃ passati, citte sati hatthacchedādidukkhañceva sabbabhayāni ca honti, alaṃ iminā cittena, acittakabhāvova santo’’ti, evaṃ citte dosaṃ passitvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā asaññasattesu nibbattati, cittamassa cuticittanirodhena idheva nivattati, rūpakkhandhamattameva tattha pātubhavati. Te tattha yathā nāma jiyāvegakkhitto saro yattako jiyāvego, tattakameva ākāse gacchati. Evameva jhānavegakkhittā upapajjitvā yattako jhānavego, tattakameva kālaṃ tiṭṭhanti, jhānavege pana parihīne tattha rūpakkhandho antaradhāyati, idha pana paṭisandhisaññā uppajjati. Yasmā pana tāya idha uppannasaññāya tesaṃ tattha cuti paññāyati, tasmā ‘‘saññuppādā ca pana te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Santatāyāti santabhāvāya. Sesamettha uttānameva. Takkīvādopi vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
后际论者的解释显示巴利原文
Aparantakappikavaṇṇanā
74 如此开示了十八种前际论者后,现在为开示四十四种后际论者,而说:“诸比丘,有……”等。其中,将属于未来分、称为“后际”的对象加以思量、执取者,即名为“后际论者”;或者说,这类人持有后际的思量,故称后际论者。其余内容,也应当依照前面所说的方式去理解。显示巴利原文
74. Evaṃ aṭṭhārasa pubbantakappike dassetvā idāni catucattārīsaṃ aparantakappike dassetuṃ – ‘‘santi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha anāgatakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhātaṃ aparantaṃ kappetvā gaṇhantīti aparantakappikā, aparantakappo vā etesaṃ atthīti aparantakappikā. Evaṃ sesampi pubbe vuttappakāranayeneva veditabbaṃ.
有想论者的解释显示巴利原文
Saññīvādavaṇṇanā
75 “死后有想论者”:所谓“杀害”是指死亡;在死后还宣称“我存在”的人,即是死后有想论者。而“有想”是他们所成立的论义,即“有想论”;他们持有此论,故称为“有想论者”。显示巴利原文
75.Uddhamāghātanikāti āghātanaṃ vuccati maraṇaṃ, uddhamāghātanā attānaṃ vadantīti uddhamāghātanikā. Saññīti pavatto vādo, saññīvādo, so etesaṃ atthīti saññīvādā.
76-77 在“有色之我”等见解中:有人如同邪命外道等,执取遍色为“我”,并将在那上面生起的想执取为“我想”;或者单凭推理而安立:“有色之我存在,无病,死后有想。”这里“无病”意为“恒常”。又有人如同尼乾子外道等,执取无色定相为“我”,并将入定中的想执取为“我想”;或者单凭推理而安立:“无色之我存在,无病,死后有想。”第三种见则依混合执而生起。第四种纯粹只是推理的执取。第二组四种见,应按照在有边无边论中所说的方式去理解。至于第三组四种:由已入定者成为“单一想”,由未入定者成为“差异想”;依小遍色而成为“少想”,依广大遍色而成为“无量想”。第四组四种:有人以天眼看见有情往生到三禅、四禅地界时,便执取为“一向乐”;看见往生地狱时,执取为“一向苦”;看见往生人间时,执取为“有苦有乐”;看见往生广果天时,执取为“不苦不乐”。尤其是,证得宿命随念智的人往往成为前际论者,而具足天眼者则成为后际论者。显示巴利原文
76-77.Rūpī attātiādīsu kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti tattha pavattasaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahetvā vā ājīvakādayo viya takkamatteneva vā ‘‘rūpī attā hoti, arogo paraṃ maraṇā saññī’’ti naṃ paññapenti. Tattha arogoti nicco. Arūpasamāpattinimittaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti samāpattisaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahetvā vā nigaṇṭhādayo viya takkamatteneva vā ‘‘arūpī attā hoti, arogo paraṃ maraṇā saññī’’ti naṃ paññapenti. Tatiyā pana missakagāhavasena pavattā diṭṭhi. Catutthā takkagāheneva. Dutiyacatukkaṃ antānantikavāde vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tatiyacatukke samāpannakavasena ekattasaññī , asamāpannakavasena nānattasaññī, parittakasiṇavasena parittasaññī, vipulakasiṇavasena appamāṇasaññīti veditabbā. Catutthacatukke pana dibbena cakkhunā tikacatukkajjhānabhūmiyaṃ nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ekantasukhī’’ti gaṇhāti. Niraye nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ekantadukkhī’’ti. Manussesu nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘sukhadukkhī’’ti. Vehapphaladevesu nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘adukkhamasukhī’’ti gaṇhāti. Visesato hi pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇalābhino pubbantakappikā honti, dibbacakkhukā aparantakappikāti.
无想论者的解释显示巴利原文
Asaññīvādavaṇṇanā
78-83 “无想论”当依据前面在有想论开头所阐述的那两种四组来理解。同样,“非想非非想论”也是如此。只不过在那里,是执取“有想之我”时所持有的那些见;而在这里,则是执取“无想”和“非想非非想”时的见。对此,不必一味地寻找绝对的原因,因为据说,怀有邪见者的执取,就像疯人的篮子一样。显示巴利原文
78-83. Asaññīvādo saññīvāde ādimhi vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena veditabbo. Tathā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādo. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘saññī attā’’ti gaṇhantānaṃ tā diṭṭhiyo, idha ‘‘asaññī’’ti ca ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti ca. Tattha na ekantena kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Diṭṭhigatikassa hi gāho ummattakapacchisadisoti vuttametaṃ.
断灭论者的解释显示巴利原文
Ucchedavādavaṇṇanā
84 在断灭论中,“存在”是指存在者的。“断灭”即彻底截断。“消亡”即不见。“非有”即存在的消失。这些全都是彼此的同义词。其中,有两种人执取断灭见:有所得者和无所得者。有所得者,指的是以阿罗汉的天眼见到死后状况,却看不见往生,或者只能见到死殁而不能见往生的人;他们因此执取断见。无所得者,则因贪著欲乐而说“谁知道有他世呢?”,或者通过推理而执取断灭,例如认为:“如同树叶从树上落下后不再重生,众生也是如此。”然而,这里应知:这七种见,是依于渴爱与邪见,经过这样或不像那样的分别之后而产生的。显示巴利原文
84. Ucchedavāde satoti vijjamānassa. Ucchedanti upacchedaṃ . Vināsanti adassanaṃ. Vibhavanti bhāvavigamaṃ. Sabbānetāni aññamaññavevacanāneva. Tattha dve janā ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhanti, lābhī ca alābhī ca. Lābhī arahato dibbena cakkhunā cutiṃ disvā upapattiṃ apassanto, yo vā cutimattameva daṭṭhuṃ sakkoti, na upapātaṃ; so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Alābhī ca ‘‘ko paralokaṃ na jānātī’’ti kāmasukhagiddhatāya vā. ‘‘Yathā rukkhato paṇṇāni patitāni na puna viruhanti, evameva sattā’’tiādinā takkena vā ucchedaṃ gaṇhāti. Idha pana taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena tathā ca aññathā ca vikappetvāva imā satta diṭṭhiyo uppannāti veditabbā.
85 其中,“有色”即具有色身。“四大所造”指由四大所构成。“父母所出”意为属于父母的。那是什么呢?即是精血。依父母所出而出生,称为“父母所出而生”。如此,以色身为首,他将人的生命体称为“我”。“有谓如是”,意思是某些人这样主张。显示巴利原文
85. Tattha rūpīti rūpavā. Cātumahābhūtikoti catumahābhūtamayo. Mātāpitūnaṃ etanti mātāpettikaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sukkasoṇitaṃ. Mātāpettike sambhūto jātoti mātāpettikasambhavo. Iti rūpakāyasīsena manussattabhāvaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti vadati. Ittheketi itthaṃ eke evameketi attho.
86 第二种人否定了那种说法,转而宣说天身。“天”指生于天界。“欲界”指属于六欲天。“啖食段食”意为以段食为食。显示巴利原文
86. Dutiyo taṃ paṭikkhipitvā dibbattabhāvaṃ vadati. Dibboti devaloke sambhūto. Kāmāvacaroti cha kāmāvacaradevapariyāpanno. Kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ bhakkhatīti kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkho.
87 “意所成”指由禅那之心所生。“具足一切肢节”指具足所有大肢与小肢。“诸根不缺”指诸根完整无缺。这是依据梵天界中所有肢节及其他众生的形态而说的。显示巴利原文
87.Manomayoti jhānamanena nibbatto. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgīti sabbaṅgapaccaṅgayutto. Ahīnindriyoti paripuṇṇindriyo. Yāni brahmaloke atthi, tesaṃ vasena itaresañca saṇṭhānavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.
88-92 “完全超越色想”等的含义,在《清净道论》中已有说明。而关于“到达空无边处”等句,应知意为“到达空无边处的存在”。此处其余内容显而易见。显示巴利原文
88-92.Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamātiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge vutto. Ākāsānañcāyatanūpagotiādīsu pana ākāsānañcāyatanabhavaṃ upagatoti, evamattho veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
现法涅槃论解说显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavaṇṇanā
93 在现法涅槃论中,“现法”是指现前可证知之法,这是对依种种处而获得的有身的称谓。“于现法中涅槃”即是现法涅槃,意为就在此有身之中苦的止息。主张这种说法的人,称为现法涅槃论者。“最上现法涅槃”指最殊胜的现法涅槃,也就是最上之意。显示巴利原文
93. Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavāde diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccati, tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Diṭṭhadhamme nibbānaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ, imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkhavūpasamananti attho. Taṃ vadantīti diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā. Paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānanti paramaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ uttamanti attho.
94 “以五欲功德”指通过可爱、可乐的色等五种欲的部分,或者说由此五种系缚。“完全投入”指很好地投入、黏着。“具足”即具备。“享受”指在那些欲功德上随心所欲地驱驰诸根,辗转流转;或者说嬉戏、享乐、游戏。此处欲功德有两种:人间的和天界的。人间的欲功德应视为如曼达塔王的欲功德,天界的欲功德则如他化自在天王的欲功德。正因那些耽著于如是诸欲的人,才会施设现法涅槃成就。显示巴利原文
94.Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti manāpiyarūpādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā. Samappitoti suṭṭhu appito allīno hutvā. Samaṅgībhūtoti samannāgato. Paricāretīti tesu kāmaguṇesu yathāsukhaṃ indriyāni cāreti sañcāreti itocito ca upaneti. Atha vā laḷati ramati kīḷati. Ettha ca duvidhā kāmaguṇā – mānusakā ceva dibbā ca. Mānusakā mandhātukāmaguṇasadisā daṭṭhabbā, dibbā paranimmitavasavattidevarājassa kāmaguṇasadisāti. Evarūpe kāme upagatānañhi te diṭṭhadhammanibbānasampattiṃ paññapenti.
95 在第二转中,应知“无常”是“已有还无”的意义,“苦”是“逼迫”的意义,“变易法”是“舍离本性”的意义。“它们变易而变异故”:由于那些欲的称为变易的变异,即如所说“我所曾有者,今已无有”,于是生起愁、悲、苦、忧、恼。其中,“愁”的特征是内心焦灼;“悲”的特征是依此而悲伤诉说;“苦”的特征是身体受逼迫;“忧”的特征是心受打击;“恼”的特征是沮丧。而“远离诸欲……”等的意义,已在《清净道论》中说明。显示巴利原文
95. Dutiyavāre hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā paṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā, pakatijahanaṭṭhena vipariṇāmadhammāti veditabbā. Tesaṃ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvāti tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vipariṇāmasaṅkhātā aññathābhāvā, yampi me ahosi, tampi me natthīti vuttanayena uppajjanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā. Tattha antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇo soko, tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇo paridevo, kāyappaṭipīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhaṃ, manovighātalakkhaṇaṃ domanassaṃ, visādalakkhaṇo upāyāso, vivicceva kāmehītiādīnamattho visuddhimagge vutto.
96 “寻”指以投向的方式生起的心所。“伺”指以推度方式生起的心所。“以此”是说,因为有此寻与伺,此初禅便显得粗糙如刺。显示巴利原文
96.Vitakkitanti abhiniropanavasena pavatto vitakko. Vicāritanti anumajjanavasena pavatto vicāro. Etenetanti etena vitakkitena ca vicāritena ca etaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ oḷārikaṃ sakaṇḍakaṃ viya khāyati.
97-98 “喜俱”即是喜本身。“心踊跃性”指使心产生踊跃的作用。“心的转向”指从禅那出定后,心对彼乐一再地回向、作意、系念。在此见法涅槃论中,其余之义清晰可解。显示巴利原文
97-98.Pītigatanti pītiyeva. Cetaso uppilāvitattanti cittassa uppilabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Cetaso ābhogoti jhānā vuṭṭhāya tasmiṃ sukhe punappunaṃ cittassa ābhogo manasikāro samannāhāroti. Sesamettha diṭṭhadhammanibbānavāde uttānameva.
至此,一切六十二见都已阐明。其中,七种为断见,其余为常见。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā sabbāpi dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo kathitā honti. Yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo.
100-104 今以「诸比丘,这些便是……」的段落,将一切后际论者总集一处,宣说一切知智。再以「诸比丘,这些便是……」等段落,将一切前际后际论者总集一处,同样宣说此智。如此,在「比丘们,哪些是法……」等问中,所问的即是一切知智;在回答时,也像以秤衡量众生的意乐,又如从须弥山脚取沙一般,提取出六十二见处后,唯宣说一切知智。这开示便是随顺次第而来。显示巴利原文
100-104. Idāni – ‘‘imehi kho te, bhikkhave’’ti iminā vārena sabbepi te aparantakappike ekajjhaṃ niyyātetvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ vissajjeti. Puna – ‘‘imehi, kho te bhikkhave’’tiādinā vārena sabbepi te pubbantāparantakappike ekajjhaṃ niyyātetvā tadeva ñāṇaṃ vissajjeti. Iti ‘‘katame ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā’’tiādimhi pucchamānopi sabbaññutaññāṇameva pucchitvā vissajjamānopi sattānaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ tulāya tulayanto viya sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viya dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni uddharitvā sabbaññutaññāṇameva vissajjeti. Evamayaṃ yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā.
经有三种次第:问次第、意乐次第、随顺次第。其中,如有比丘问世尊:「尊者,什么是此岸?什么是彼岸?什么是沉于中流?什么是滞于高地?什么是被人执取?什么是被非人执取?什么是被漩涡执取?什么是内部腐败?」(《相应部》4.241),依世尊对此解答的经典,应知这是问次第。显示巴利原文
Tayo hi suttassa anusandhī – pucchānusandhi, ajjhāsayānusandhi, yathānusandhīti. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – kiṃ nu kho, bhante, orimaṃ tīraṃ, kiṃ pārimaṃ tīraṃ, ko majjhe saṃsīdo, ko thale ussādo, ko manussaggāho, ko amanussaggāho, ko āvaṭṭaggāho, ko antopūtibhāvo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.241) evaṃ pucchantānaṃ bhagavatā vissajjitasuttavasena pucchānusandhi veditabbo.
那时,有一位比丘心中生起这样的思惟:「贤者,据说色是无我……受……想……行……识是无我。既然诸业无我,又将触及什么样的我呢?」随即,世尊以心了知那位比丘的心念,便告诸比丘说:「诸比丘,实有可能,此中有一愚痴人,无知,为无明所覆,其心被爱所支配,竟会起念超越大师的教法而这样想:『贤者,据说色是无我……(略)……它们将触及……』。诸比丘,你们意下如何,色是常还是无常?」(《中部》3.10)。如此,世尊了知他人意乐后所开示的经典,当知即是意乐次第。显示巴利原文
Atha kho aññatarassa bhikkhuno evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi – ‘‘iti kira bho rūpaṃ anattā…, vedanā…, saññā…, saṅkhārā …, viññāṇaṃ anattā, anattakatāni kira kammāni kamattānaṃ phusissantī’’ti. Atha kho bhagavā tassa bhikkhuno cetasā ceto parivitakkamaññāya bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, vijjati, yaṃ idhekacco moghapuriso avidvā avijjāgato taṇhādhipateyyena cetasā satthusāsanaṃ atidhāvitabbaṃ maññeyya – ‘‘iti kira bho rūpaṃ anattā…pe… phusissantī’’ti. Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.10). Evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā bhagavatā vuttasuttavasena ajjhāsayānusandhi veditabbo.
然而,当某一法在开篇被教导时,在那些经中,往后的开示或依随顺该法的法,或依对立法而出现,应知此即为随顺次第。例如:《希望经》以戒为开篇,往后则出现六神通;《布经》以烦恼为开篇,往后则出现梵住;《憍赏弥经》以争论为开篇,往后则出现可念法;《锯喻经》以不忍耐为开篇,往后则出现锯喻;此《梵网经》以见为开篇,往后则出现对空性的阐明。因此说:‘此开示是随顺次第而来。’显示巴利原文
Yena pana dhammena ādimhi desanā uṭṭhitā, tassa dhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā paṭipakkhavasena vā yesu suttesu upari desanā āgacchati, tesaṃ vasena yathānusandhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasutte heṭṭhā sīlena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari cha abhiññā āgatā. Vatthasutte heṭṭhā kilesena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari brahmavihārā āgatā. Kosambakasutte heṭṭhā bhaṇḍanena uṭṭhitā, upari sāraṇīyadhammā āgatā. Kakacūpame heṭṭhā akkhantiyā uṭṭhitā, upari kakacūpamā āgatā. Imasmimpi brahmajāle heṭṭhā diṭṭhivasena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari suññatāpakāsanaṃ āgataṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘evamayaṃ yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti.
这部分注释是关于「战栗、挣扎」的。显示巴利原文
Paritassitavipphanditavāravaṇṇanā
105-117 105–117. 如今,为阐明界限的区分,佛陀开始了‘比丘们,在那里……’等语的开示。那也只是他们不了知、不见真实法的沙门、婆罗门的感受,陷入了渴爱,纯然是‘战栗与挣扎’而已。他们由那种见之味著、见之乐、见之感受而生起喜悦,依四种根据安立‘我及世间是常恒’;那也只是他们不了知、不亲见诸法如实自性的沙门、婆罗门的感受,陷入了渴爱,纯然是陷入了渴爱的感受,且那确实只是‘战栗与挣扎’。也就是说,由所谓‘见’与所谓‘渴爱’所引发的战栗、挣扎、动摇、震动,犹如插在灰堆里的木桩,并不像入流者的见那样坚定不移。这是它的展示方式。同样的道理亦适用于‘某部分常恒论者’等。显示巴利原文
105-117. Idāni mariyādavibhāgadassanatthaṃ – ‘‘tatra bhikkhave’’tiādikā desanā āraddhā. Tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditamevāti yena diṭṭhiassādena diṭṭhisukhena diṭṭhivedayitena te somanassajātā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṃ bhavantānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ kevalaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃyeva taṃ vedayitaṃ, tañca kho panetaṃ paritassitavipphanditameva. Diṭṭhisaṅkhātena ceva taṇhāsaṅkhātena ca paritassitena vipphanditameva calitameva kampitameva thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇusadisaṃ, na sotāpannassa dassanamiva niccalanti dasseti. Esa nayo ekaccasassatavādādīsupi.
这部分注释是关于「以触为缘」的。显示巴利原文
Phassapaccayavāravaṇṇanā
118-130 118–130. 再次,为显示相续缘,佛陀开始了‘比丘们,在那里,那些持常恒论的沙门、婆罗门……’等语的开示。这里‘那也只是以触为缘’,意谓他们由那种见之味著、见之乐、见之感受而生起喜悦,依四种根据安立‘我及世间是常恒’;那被渴爱与见所动摇的感受,亦是以触为缘。这是它的说明方式。同样的道理适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
118-130. Puna – ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā’’tiādi paramparapaccayadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ . Tattha tadapi phassapaccayāti yena diṭṭhiassādena diṭṭhisukhena diṭṭhivedayitena te somanassajātā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi taṇhādiṭṭhipariphanditaṃ vedayitaṃ phassapaccayāti dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
131-143 现在,为了显示该缘在所见所感中的强力作用,再次说:“比丘们,在那里,那些持常见论的沙门、婆罗门……”等。其中,“他们确实除了触之外……”意思是指,那些沙门、婆罗门认为能在没有触的情况下感受那种感受,这是不成立的。正如支撑倾斜房屋的柱子是一个强有力的缘,没有柱子房屋便不能立住;同样,触也是受的强有力的缘,这表明没有触,这种所见所感就不会存在。此理适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
131-143. Idāni tassa paccayassa diṭṭhivedayite balavabhāvadassanatthaṃ puna – ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā’’tiādimāha. Tattha te vata aññatra phassāti te vata samaṇabrāhmaṇā taṃ vedayitaṃ vinā phassena paṭisaṃvedissantīti kāraṇametaṃ natthīti. Yathā hi patato gehassa upatthambhanatthāya thūṇā nāma balavapaccayo hoti, na taṃ thūṇāya anupatthambhitaṃ ṭhātuṃ sakkoti, evameva phassopi vedanāya balavapaccayo, taṃ vinā idaṃ diṭṭhivedayitaṃ natthīti dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
关于陷入邪见、确立、轮回之说的解释显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānavaṭṭakathāvaṇṇanā
144 现在,以“比丘们,在那里,那些持常见论的沙门、婆罗门以四种根据安立‘我及世间是常’,以及那些持一分常见论的沙门、婆罗门……”等方式,把一切所见所感汇集在一起。为什么?是为了随后将其归入“触”中。如何归入?“他们全都是通过六触处,触了又触之后而感受。”其中,六触处是指:眼触处、耳触处、鼻触处、舌触处、身触处、意触处。因为“处”这个词,在“出生处”、“集会处”、“原因”、“仅是施设”等意义中被使用。例如,“甘菩阇是马的出生处,南印度是牛的出生处”——这是在“出生处”的意义上使用的,意思是出生之地。“在可意的处所,鸟类群集而住”——这是在“集会处”的意义上使用的。“在念处时”——这是在“原因”的意义上使用的。“在森林处的叶屋中平息”——这是在“仅是施设”的意义上使用的。而这里所用的“处”,在“出生处”等三种意义上也都可以成立。因为在眼等处,以触为第五的诸法得以出生、集会,而且眼等也是这些法的原因,所以称为“处”。但在此处,根据“缘眼与色而生起眼识,三者合会为触”这一方式,将教说归结于“触”。显示巴利原文
144. Idāni tatra bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikātiādinā nayena sabbadiṭṭhivedayitāni sampiṇḍeti. Kasmā? Upari phasse pakkhipanatthāya. Kathaṃ? Sabbe te chahi phassāyatanehi phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentīti. Tattha cha phassāyatanāni nāma – cakkhuphassāyatanaṃ, sotaphassāyatanaṃ, ghānaphassāyatanaṃ, jivhāphassāyatanaṃ, kāyaphassāyatanaṃ, manophassāyatananti imāni cha. Sañjāti-samosaraṇa-kāraṇa-paṇṇattimattatthesu hi ayaṃ āyatanasaddo pavattati. Tattha – ‘‘kambojo assānaṃ āyatanaṃ, gunnaṃ dakkhiṇāpatho’’ti sañjātiyaṃ pavattati, sañjātiṭṭhāneti attho. ‘‘Manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’ti (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇe. ‘‘Sati satiāyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.102) kāraṇe. ‘‘Araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu sammantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.255) paṇṇattimatte. Svāyamidha sañjātiādiatthattayepi yujjati. Cakkhādīsu hi phassapañcamakā dhammā sañjāyanti samosaranti, tāni ca tesaṃ kāraṇanti āyatanāni. Idha pana ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.43) iminā nayena phassasīseneva desanaṃ āropetvā phassaṃ ādiṃ katvā paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ phassāyatanādīni vuttāni.
“触了又触之后而感受”意思是,触了又触之后而感受。这里,虽然经文似乎说诸处有触的作用,但不应认为诸处真的具有触的作用。因为诸处并不触,而是触本身去触各个所缘;然而,诸处是作为触的依处而被指出的。因此,这里的含义应如此理解:他们所有这些人,都是通过由六触处生起的触,触了色等所缘之后,感受到了那种见之感受。显示巴利原文
Phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentīti phusitvā phusitvā paṭisaṃvedenti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi āyatanānaṃ phusanakiccaṃ viya vuttaṃ, tathāpi na tesaṃ phusanakiccatā veditabbā. Na hi āyatanāni phusanti, phassova taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusati, āyatanāni pana phasse upanikkhipitvā dassitāni; tasmā sabbe te cha phassāyatanasambhavena phassena rūpādīni ārammaṇāni phusitvā taṃ diṭṭhivedanaṃ paṭisaṃvedayantīti evamettha attho veditabbo.
在“对他们而言,以受为缘而有渴爱”等句中,“受”指由六触处所生的感受。这种受成为种种渴爱——如对色的渴爱等——的亲依止缘。因此说:“对他们而言,以受为缘而有渴爱”。而此处的渴爱,又成为四种取的缘,既是取的亲依止缘,也是取的俱生缘。同样地,取是有的缘,有则是生的亲依止缘。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ vedanāpaccayā taṇhātiādīsu vedanāti cha phassāyatanasambhavā vedanā. Sā rūpataṇhādibhedāya taṇhāya upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tesaṃ vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti. Sā pana catubbidhassa upādānassa upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā ca paccayo hoti. Tathā upādānaṃ bhavassa. Bhavo jātiyā upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo hoti.
此处所说的“生”,应理解为有变异的五蕴。生不仅是老死的亲依止缘,也是忧愁等的亲依止缘。以上是此处的略说;关于缘起的详细阐述,在《清净道论》中已述。在此只需了知要义即可。世尊在开示轮回时说:“诸比丘,无明的前际是不可知的,不能说‘在此之前无明不存在,后来才生起’。诸比丘,虽这样表述,但‘以此缘而有此无明’却是可知的。”有时又以渴爱为开端说:“诸比丘,有爱的前际是不可知的……‘以此缘而有此有爱’。”有时也以邪见为开端说:“诸比丘,有见的前际是不可知的……‘以此缘而有此有见’。”而在这里,世尊正是以邪见为开端来开示的。他首先解说了因对受的贪染而生起的种种邪见,进而解说了以受为根本的缘起。由此表明:“这些陷入邪见之人,执取此见后,于三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九众生居之中,不断流转轮回,从此处到彼处,又从彼处到此处。犹如套着轭绕圈的公牛、拴在柱上的狗,又如被风吹离航道的船只,徒然流转于轮回之苦,完全没有显示巴利原文
Jātīti panettha savikārā pañcakkhandhā daṭṭhabbā, jāti jarāmaraṇassa ceva sokādīnañca upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana paṭiccasamuppādakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Idha panassa payojanamattameva veditabbaṃ. Bhagavā hi vaṭṭakathaṃ kathento – ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ‘ito pubbe avijjā nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī’ti evañcetaṃ, bhikkhave, vuccati, atha ca pana paññāyati ‘‘idappaccayā avijjā’’ti (a. ni. 10.61) evaṃ avijjāsīsena vā, purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavataṇhāya…pe… ‘‘idappaccayā bhavataṇhā’’ti (a. ni. 10.62) evaṃ taṇhāsīsena vā, purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavadiṭṭhiyā…pe… ‘‘idappaccayā bhavadiṭṭhī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhisīsena vā kathesi’’. Idha pana diṭṭhisīsena kathento vedanārāgena uppajjamānā diṭṭhiyo kathetvā vedanāmūlakaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ kathesi. Tena idaṃ dasseti – ‘‘evamete diṭṭhigatikā, idaṃ dassanaṃ gahetvā tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu ito ettha etto idhāti sandhāvantā saṃsarantā yante yuttagoṇo viya, thambhe upanibaddhakukkuro viya, vātena vippannaṭṭhanāvā viya ca vaṭṭadukkhameva anuparivattanti, vaṭṭadukkhato sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkontī’’ti.
对“还灭之说”等的解释显示巴利原文
Vivaṭṭakathādivaṇṇanā
145 145. 如此,开示了以邪见者为立足处的轮回之后,为显示以如理精进比丘为立足处的还灭,世尊复说:“诸比丘,自从比丘……”等语。其中,“自从”意为“当……时”。“六触处”:那些邪见者,正是依此六触处触对、领受而流转,此处所说的六触处,即是此六触处本身。关于“集”等,应依“受业处”中所说方式,即以“无明集故眼集”等,来理解诸触处的集等。然而,如彼处说“触集故触灭”,此处对于眼等,应知为“食集故食灭”;对于意处,则是“名色集故名色灭”。显示巴利原文
145. Evaṃ diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ kathetvā idāni yuttayogabhikkhuadhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā vivaṭṭaṃ dassento – ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādimāha. Tattha yatoti yadā. Channaṃ phassāyatanānanti yehi chahi phassāyatanehi phusitvā paṭisaṃvedayamānānaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ vattati, tesaṃyeva channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ. Samudayantiādīsu avijjāsamudayā cakkhusamudayotiādinā vedanākammaṭṭhāne vuttanayena phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādayo veditabbā. Yathā pana tattha ‘‘phassasamudayā phassanirodhā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha, taṃ cakkhādīsu – ‘‘āhārasamudayā āhāranirodhā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Manāyatane ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā nāmarūpanirodhā’’ti.
“知更上者”:执邪见者唯知邪见;而此比丘则了知邪见,亦了知较邪见更上的戒、定、慧、解脱,乃至证知阿拉汉果。谁如此了知?漏尽者了知,不还者了知,一来者了知,入流者了知,多闻持诵的比丘了知,已着手修观者了知。然而,此开示乃以阿拉汉果为顶点而结束。显示巴利原文
Uttaritaraṃ pajānātīti diṭṭhigatiko diṭṭhimeva jānāti. Ayaṃ pana diṭṭhiñca diṭṭhito ca uttaritaraṃ sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttinti yāva arahattā jānāti. Ko evaṃ jānātīti? Khīṇāsavo jānāti, anāgāmī, sakadāgāmī, sotāpanno, bahussuto, ganthadharo bhikkhu jānāti, āraddhavipassako jānāti. Desanā pana arahattanikūṭeneva niṭṭhāpitāti.
146 如此开示了还灭之后,为显明“无有邪见者能脱出说法之网”之义,世尊复又说:“诸比丘,不论何等……”等语。其中,“被置于网内”:即被安置于这说法之网的内部。“依附于此”:依附、倚靠、安住于此说法之网中。“浮沉时,即浮沉着”是何义?即他们无论向下沉没或向上浮出,皆住于我之说法网中而浮沉。“包含于此”:即被包摄于此说法之网内,为网所缚、成网中物而浮沉,并非在此之外另有未被摄受的邪见者存在。显示巴利原文
146. Evaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ kathetvā idāni ‘‘desanājālavimutto diṭṭhigatiko nāma natthī’’ti dassanatthaṃ puna – ‘‘ye hi keci, bhikkhave’’ti ārabhi. Tattha antojālīkatāti imassa mayhaṃ desanājālassa antoyeva katā. Ettha sitā vāti etasmiṃ mama desanājāle sitā nissitā avasitāva. Ummujjamānā ummujjantīti kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Te adho osīdantāpi uddhaṃ uggacchantāpi mama desanājāle sitāva hutvā osīdanti ca uggacchanti ca. Ettha pariyāpannāti ettha mayhaṃ desanājāle pariyāpannā, etena ābaddhā antojālīkatā ca hutvā ummujjamānā ummujjanti, na hettha asaṅgahito diṭṭhigatiko nāma atthīti.
“以细网”:意谓网眼细密、网孔微细的网。于此,当知譬喻之对应:世尊如渔夫,说法如网,一万世界界犹如一小片水域,六十二种邪见者如诸粗大水族。犹如渔夫立于岸边观察时,见粗大水族尽入网内,世尊亦见一切邪见者皆入于说法之网内。此即譬喻所应知者。显示巴利原文
Sukhumacchikenāti saṇhaacchikena sukhumacchiddenāti attho. Kevaṭṭo viya hi bhagavā, jālaṃ viya desanā, parittaudakaṃ viya dasasahassilokadhātu, oḷārikā pāṇā viya dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatikā. Tassa tīre ṭhatvā olokentassa oḷārikānaṃ pāṇānaṃ antojālīkatabhāvadassanaṃ viya bhagavato sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ desanājālassa antokatabhāvadassananti evamettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
147 147. 如此,因为这六十二种邪见已含摄一切邪见,显示了所有邪见者都被包含于此说法之网中之后,现在,为了显示如来自身不包含于任何处,世尊说:“诸比丘,如来的身体已断除有爱之索……”等语。其中,“索”:依此而牵引故为“索”。在世俗中,它指套在脖子上用来拖拽的绳索,这是绳索的名称。但在此处,因与索相似,故以“有爱”为“索”。因为那有爱将大众套住脖子,牵引、导引到种种生存,故称“有爱之索”。以阿罗汉道之剑断除了有爱之索者,为“已断除有爱之索者”。显示巴利原文
147. Evaṃ imāhi dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ saṅgahitattā sabbesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ etasmiṃ desanājāle pariyāpannabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni attano katthaci apariyāpannabhāvaṃ dassento – ‘‘ucchinnabhavanettiko, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa kāyo’’tiādimāha. Tattha nayanti etāyāti netti. Nayantīti gīvāya bandhitvā ākaḍḍhanti, rajjuyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Idha pana nettisadisatāya bhavataṇhā nettīti adhippetā. Sā hi mahājanaṃ gīvāya bandhitvā taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ neti upanetīti bhavanetti. Arahattamaggasatthena ucchinnā bhavanetti assāti ucchinnabhavanettiko.
“身坏之后”:指身体毁坏之后。“命终之后”:指寿命完全耗尽、灭尽,不再有结生的状态。“他们将见不到”:指见不到那位如来。天或人都将见不到他,意即他将进入不可施设的状态。显示巴利原文
Kāyassa bhedā uddhanti kāyassa bhedato uddhaṃ. Jīvitapariyādānāti jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā, puna appaṭisandhikabhāvāti attho. Na taṃ dakkhantīti taṃ tathāgataṃ. Devā vā manussā vā na dakkhissanti, apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gamissatīti attho.
“诸比丘,譬如……”这譬喻的对比如下:如来的身体犹如芒果树,树上所生的大蒂犹如过去依止此身而转起的渴爱。当渴爱存在时,以渴爱为系缚,将来会产生的五蕴、十二处、十八界,如同系属于那蒂上的芒果,分别为五颗一簇、十二颗一簇、十八颗一簇。当那蒂被砍断时,所有那些芒果都随之而断,因为它们都追随那蒂,蒂断则断。同样地,由于有爱之蒂尚未被彻底切断,那些在未来会生起的五蕴、十二处、十八界,所有这些法都随之而有,都追随有爱;当有爱被切断时,它们也就断了。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpi, bhikkhaveti, upamāyaṃ pana idaṃ saṃsandanaṃ. Ambarukkho viya hi tathāgatassa kāyo, rukkhe jātamahāvaṇṭo viya taṃ nissāya pubbe pavattataṇhā. Tasmiṃ vaṇṭe upanibaddhā pañcapakkadvādasapakkaaṭṭhārasapakkaparimāṇā ambapiṇḍī viya taṇhāya sati taṇhūpanibandhanā hutvā āyatiṃ nibbattanakā pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo. Yathā pana tasmiṃ vaṇṭe chinne sabbāni tāni ambāni tadanvayāni honti, taṃyeva vaṇṭaṃ anugatāni, vaṇṭacchedā chinnāni yevāti attho; evameva ye bhavanettivaṇṭassa anupacchinnattā āyatiṃ uppajjeyyuṃ pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasadhātuyo, sabbe te dhammā tadanvayā honti bhavanettiṃ anugatā, tāya chinnāya chinnā yevāti attho.
又比如那棵树,由于沾染青蛙毒刺的毒性而逐渐枯死之后,便只留下一个称呼:“此处曾有过这样的一棵树”,再也没有谁看见那棵树;同样地,因接触圣道,渴爱的滋润被彻底耗尽,在此身如同逐渐枯死后坏灭,身坏命终之后,天与人也都见不到如来,唯留下一个名称:“据说曾有过这样一位大师的教法。”世尊将开示导归无余涅槃界后,便结束了这次说法。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana tasmimpi rukkhe maṇḍūkakaṇṭakavisasamphassaṃ āgamma anupubbena sussitvā mate – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne evarūpo nāma rukkho ahosī’’ti vohāramattameva hoti, na taṃ rukkhaṃ koci passati, evaṃ ariyamaggasamphassaṃ āgamma taṇhāsinehassa pariyādinnattā anupubbena sussitvā viya bhinne imasmiṃ kāye, kāyassa bhedā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā na taṃ dakkhanti, tathāgatampi devamanussā na dakkhissanti, evarūpassa nāma kira satthuno idaṃ sāsananti vohāramattameva bhavissatīti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ pāpetvā desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
148 148. 经文“如是说已,具寿阿难……”的意思是:世尊在这部经中如此宣说完毕后,长老从头到尾忆持了整部经,这样显扬了佛陀的威力后,心想:“世尊没有为所说的这部经命名,让我来请世尊为之命名吧。”于是对世尊说了这番话。显示巴利原文
148.Evaṃvutte āyasmā ānandoti evaṃ bhagavatā imasmiṃ sutte vutte thero ādito paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ suttaṃ samannāharitvā evaṃ buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā kathitasuttassa na bhagavatā nāmaṃ gahitaṃ, handassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāpessāmīti cintetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca.
因此,在“所以,阿难,你应当……”等句中的义理联结是这样的:阿难,由于在此法门中,此方的义理与彼方的义理都已阐明,所以你应当持此法门为“义网”;又因为其中讲述了众多经法,所以你应当持之为“法网”;又因为其中以最胜的义理阐明了称为“梵”的一切知智,所以你应当持之为“梵网”;又因为其中阐明了六十二种邪见,所以你应当持之为“见网”;更因为听闻此法门后,能摧破天子魔、蕴魔、死魔和烦恼魔,所以你应当持之为“无上的战场胜利”。显示巴利原文
Tasmātiha tvantiādīsu ayamatthayojanā – ānanda, yasmā imasmiṃ dhammapariyāye idhatthopi paratthopi vibhatto, tasmātiha tvaṃ imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ ‘‘atthajāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā panettha bahū tantidhammā kathitā, tasmā ‘‘dhammajāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā ca ettha seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ vibhattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘brahmajāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā ettha dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo vibhattā, tasmā ‘‘diṭṭhijāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā pana imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā devaputtamārampi khandhamārampi maccumārampi kilesamārampi sakkā maddituṃ, tasmā ‘‘anuttaro saṅgāmavijayotipi naṃ dhārehī’’ti.
「世尊说了此言」:这是指从因缘序分开端,一直到「你应当将其持为无上的战场胜利」为止,世尊宣说了整部经。他以他人智慧所不能及的、极为深彻的一切知智,犹如太阳驱散黑暗那样,驱散邪见的大黑暗而宣说。显示巴利原文
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ nidānāvasānato pabhuti yāva ‘‘anuttaro saṅgāmavijayotipi naṃ dhārehī’’ti sakalaṃ suttantaṃ bhagavā paresaṃ paññāya alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhaṃ paramagambhīraṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pakāsento sūriyo viya andhakāraṃ diṭṭhigatamahandhakāraṃ vidhamanto avoca.
149 「那些比丘满心欢喜」:指那些比丘满心欢喜,即心意满足,因殷重于佛陀的喜悦而心怀踊悦。「世尊所说法」:这是指世尊以种种理趣庄严的教说而宣说此经,其音声如同迦陵频伽鸟的鸣啭,悦耳怡心,仿佛以不死甘露灌顶般,令智者之心满足,以梵音宣说。「他们欢喜」:意思是他们既随喜,也信受。因为“欢喜”一词,在类似“欢喜、迎请”等场合中,也用来指贪爱;而在“诸天与人皆唯欢喜食物”等句中,则表示接近。显示巴利原文
149.Attamanā te bhikkhūti te bhikkhū attamanā sakamanā, buddhagatāya pītiyā udaggacittā hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavato bhāsitanti evaṃ vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttaṃ idaṃ suttaṃ karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsamānassa bhagavato vacanaṃ. Abhinandunti anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu ca. Ayañhi abhinandasaddo – ‘‘abhinandati abhivadatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.5) taṇhāyampi āgato. ‘‘Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.43) upagamanepi.
远游久居他乡之人,从远方平安归来,
亲友、朋辈与知交,都为他的归来而欢喜。(《法句经》219)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cirappavāsiṃ purisaṃ, dūrato sotthimāgataṃ; Ñātimittā suhajjā ca, abhinandanti āgata’’nti. (dha. pa. 219);
在表示“欢喜、迎请”等字眼中,也包含“接受”的意思。而在“欢喜并随喜后”等表述中,它也具有“随喜”的意思。在这里,这个词兼具“随喜”与“接受”两种含义。因此说“他们欢喜”,意思是他们既随喜,也接受了。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu sampaṭicchanepi. ‘‘Abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) anumodanepi. Svāyamidha anumodanasampaṭicchanesu yujjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abhinandunti anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cā’’ti.
此是善说,此是妙语,那位如如者,称叹“善哉、善哉”;
比丘们随喜赞叹,以头顶礼而受持。
显示巴利原文 Subhāsitaṃ sulapitaṃ, ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti tādino; Anumodamānā sirasā, sampaṭicchiṃsu bhikkhavoti.
再者,“于此记说中”即指在这部无偈颂的经中。正因为无有偈颂,所以称之为“记说”。显示巴利原文
Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasminti imasmiṃ niggāthakasutte. Niggāthakattā hi idaṃ veyyākaraṇanti vuttaṃ.
“一万世界界”:指方圆一万个轮围世界那么大的世界界。“震动”:不应理解为仅在经末才震动,因为经文说“在讲说时”。也就是说,当开示六十二种邪见时,每讲完一种邪见,便震动一次;因此应知,在六十二个地方都发生过震动。显示巴利原文
Dasasahassīlokadhātūti dasasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇā lokadhātu. Akampitthāti na suttapariyosāneyeva akampitthāti veditabbā. Bhaññamāneti hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatesu viniveṭhetvā desiyamānesu tassa tassa diṭṭhigatassa pariyosāne pariyosāneti dvāsaṭṭhiyā ṭhānesu akampitthāti veditabbā.
于此,当知大地震动有八种因缘:即因界的扰动、因具神通者的威力、因菩萨入胎、因从母胎出离、因证得正觉、因转法轮、因舍寿行、因般涅槃。对此八因的分辨,将依《大般涅槃经》中所说“阿难,这八种因、八种缘,会引发大地强烈震动”等文句,在注释该经时再作解说。然而,这片大地在其他八种场合也曾震动:在大出离时、前往菩提座时、捡拾粪扫衣时、洗涤粪扫衣时、在《黑园经》中、在《乔达摩经》中、在《韦桑答拉本生》中,以及在这部《梵网经》中。其中,在大出离与前往菩提座时,是因精进力而震动;在捡拾粪扫衣时,世尊舍离了周绕二千岛屿的四大洲而出家,前往坟场捡拾粪扫衣,由于世尊行此极为难行之事,大地被这稀有、不可思议的力量所冲击而震动;在洗涤粪扫衣及《韦桑答拉本生》之时,是因非时而震动;在《黑园经》与《乔达摩经》中,是以“我为世尊作证”的方式而震动;而在本《梵网经》中,当六十二种邪见的缠结被解开、毫无滞碍地得到解明时,是以给予“善哉”的称扬方式而震动。显示巴利原文
Tattha aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi pathavīkampo veditabbo – dhātukkhobhena, iddhimato ānubhāvena, bodhisattassa gabbhokkantiyā, mātukucchito nikkhamanena, sambodhippattiyā, dhammacakkappavattanena, āyusaṅkhārossajjanena, parinibbānenāti. Tesaṃ vinicchayaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, hetū aṭṭha paccayā mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāyā’’ti evaṃ mahāparinibbāne āgatāya tantiyā vaṇṇanākāle vakkhāma. Ayaṃ pana mahāpathavī aparesupi aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu akampittha – mahābhinikkhamane, bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamane, paṃsukūlaggahaṇe, paṃsukūladhovane, kāḷakārāmasutte, gotamakasutte, vessantarajātake, imasmiṃ brahmajāleti. Tattha mahābhinikkhamanabodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanesu vīriyabalena akampittha. Paṃsukūlaggahaṇe dvisahassadīpaparivāre cattāro mahādīpe pahāya pabbajitvā susānaṃ gantvā paṃsukūlaṃ gaṇhantena dukkaraṃ bhagavatā katanti acchariyavegābhihatā akampittha. Paṃsukūladhovanavessantarajātakesu akālakampanena akampittha. Kāḷakārāmagotamakasuttesu – ‘‘ahaṃ sakkhī bhagavā’’ti sakkhibhāvena akampittha. Imasmiṃ pana brahmajāle dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatesu vijaṭetvā niggumbaṃ katvā desiyamānesu sādhukāradānavasena akampitthāti veditabbā.
不但这些处所大地曾经震动,在三次结集时也曾震动;当玛欣德大长老来到此岛,于觉音林坐下说法之日,大地亦曾震动。在迦良那寺,宾头卢长老将塔院清扫洁净后,便在那里坐下,以佛陀为所缘而生起欢喜心,开始诵持这部经典。诵毕之时,水涌出地表,大地因而震动。在铜殿东侧的芒果树下,长部诵者长老们坐下讽诵《梵网经》,诵毕之时,同样令水涌出地表,大地为之震动。显示巴利原文
Na kevalañca etesu ṭhānesuyeva pathavī akampittha, atha kho tīsu saṅgahesupi mahāmahindattherassa imaṃ dīpaṃ āgantvā jotivane nisīditvā dhammaṃ desitadivasepi akampittha. Kalyāṇiyavihāre ca piṇḍapātiyattherassa cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā tattheva nisīditvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā imaṃ suttantaṃ āraddhassa suttapariyosāne udakapariyantaṃ katvā akampittha. Lohapāsādassa pācīnaambalaṭṭhikaṭṭhānaṃ nāma ahosi. Tattha nisīditvā dīghabhāṇakattherā brahmajālasuttaṃ ārabhiṃsu, tesaṃ sajjhāyapariyosānepi udakapariyantameva katvā pathavī akampitthāti.
正是凭此威力,大地曾以种种方式震动;
这部最胜经,是由自生者所宣说的。
智者于此《梵网经》的法与义理,
恭敬学习之后,当如理践行。
显示巴利原文 Evaṃ yassānubhāvena, akampittha anekaso; Medanī suttaseṭṭhassa, desitassa sayambhunā. Brahmajālassa tassīdha, dhammaṃ atthañca paṇḍitā; Sakkaccaṃ uggahetvāna, paṭipajjantu yonisoti.